INSTRUCTION FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. INSTRUCTION.FOR,LD ARTTILLE PREPARED BY A BOARD OF ARTILLERY OFFICERS. PHILADEL P IA: J. B. LIPPINCOTT & CO. 1861. Entered, according to act of Congress, in the year 1860, by J. B. LIPPINCOTT & CO. In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States in and for the Eastern District of Pennsylvania. BALTIMORE, Md., January 15, 1859. Colonel S. COOPER, Adjt. Gen. U. S. A. SIR: The Light Artillery Board, assembled by Special Orders No. 134 of 1856, and Special Orders No. 116 of 1858, has the honor to submit a revised system of Light Artillery Tactics, and regulations recommended for that arm. WM. H. FRENCH, Bt. Major, Capt. PFirst Artillery. WILLIAM F. BARRY, Capt. Second Artillery. HENRY J. HUNT, Bt. iMaor, Capt. Second Artrillery. WAR DEPARTMENT, March 6, 1860. The system of instruction for Field Artillery, prepared by a Board of Light Artillery officers pursuant to orders from this Department, having been approved by the PRESIDENT, is herewith published for the information and government of the Army. All exercises, manoeuvres, and forms of parade not embraced in this system, are prohibited in the Light Artillery, and those herein prescribed will be strictly observed. JOJN B. FLOYD, Secretary of TWar. (v) E 2Y T:RA C: T "AN ACT to establish an uniform mode of discipline andfield exercise for the militia of the United States. "SECTION 1. That the system of discipline and field exercise, which is and shall be ordered to be observed by the regular Army of the United States, in the different corps of infantry, artillery, and riflemen, shall also be observed by the militia, in the exercise and discipline of the said corps, respectively, throughout the United States." APPROVED, May 12, 1820. (vi) TABLE OF CONTENTS. PART I. ORGANIZATION, MATERIEL, AND SERVICE. PLATES PPAGE ARTICLE..- ARTILLERY AND ITS DUTIESS.......................... Artillery troops and their service................................ Uses and objects of field artillery................................ 2 Materiel,pieces...................................................... 2 Carriages.............................................................. 3 Battery of manoeuvre................................................ 3 Number of horses required for each carriage................. Personnel.................................................. Proportion of field artillery to other arms..................... 4 ARTICLE II.-ORGANIZATION AND EQUIPMENT OF FIELD 3ATTERIES.................................................. 5 Organization for instruction....................................... 5 Organization for the march....................................... 5 Organization for war................................................ 5 Composition and equipment of battery for war............... 7 Field pieces. Description........................................ 8 Field pieces. Principal dimensions and weight............. 9 AMMUNITION. Gunpowder. Composition..................... 9 Density.............................................................. 10 Proof................................................................ 10 Charges.............................................................. 11 Cartridge bags..................................................... 11 (vii) Viii TABLE OF CONTENTS. PLATES PAGE 1 PROJECTILES. Kinds of................................. 11 Solid shot............................................................ 11 Canisters............................................ 11 Shells........................................................... 12 Charges of shells............................................ 12 Shrapnell or spherical case shot.................. 12 Charges of Shrapnell........................................... 13 1 Fuze. Description.................................. 13 Operation of........................................................ 14 Primer........................................................... 14 Description.......................................................... 14 Issues of ammunition to batteries............................. 14 Care and preservation of ammunition......................... 14 Weights of fixed ammunition.................................. 15 Contents and weights of packing boxes..................... 15 8 to 17 FIELD CARRIAGES. Number and kinds of gun carriages.. 16 Caissons.............................................................. 16 Battery wagons............................................. 16 Travelling forges................................................. 16 Limber for field carriages....................................... 16 Wheels............................................................ 16 2 Ammunition chests.................................................... 17 Ammunition carried in each chest........................... 19 Method of packing ammunition chests...................... 21 Implements and equipments for a gun carriage........... 21 Implements and equipments for a caisson.................21 Weights of gun carriages and caissons equipped......... 22 Equipment of the travelling forge............................ 23 Equipment of the battery wagon.............................. 27 Supply of spare parts........................................... 33 Composition and preparation of paints...................... 33 Quantity of paint required for a carriage............., 34 Paint for tarpaulins..3.................................... 34 Weights of forges and battery wagons equipped......... 35 HORSES. Number required for a field battery............... 35 Spare horses for prairie service............... 36 For cannoneers of horse artillery............................. 36 iorse equipments. Number of sets required.................. 36 Artillery harness. Description and peculiarities........... 36 Harness required for each horse............................... 37 TABLE OF CONTENTS. ix PLATES PAGE ARTICLE III.-POINTING AND RANGES............................ 38 Definitions.............................................................. 38 Theory of pointing.................................................. 39 Pendulum hausse............................................ 40 Seat for pendulum hausse........................................ 40 Muzzle sight....................................................... 40 Practical hints on pointing....................................... 41 Causes which disturb the true flight of projectiles.......... 41 Rapidity of fire at advancing bodies............................ 42 Table of ranges for field service................................. 43 ARTICLE IV.-INTERIOR ECONOMY or A BATTEY...............46 Artillery horses. Description...................................... 46 Working power....................................... 47 Forage................................................................ 47 Necessity of grain ration....................................... 47 Water....................................................... 48 General rules for stable management........................ 48 Grooming............................................................. 50 ARTICLE V.- FIELD SERVICE........................................ 52 Marches................................................................. 52 Ascents 5.......................................................... 55 Descents.................................................................... 56 To cross swampy ground........................................... 56 To pass a ditch.......................................................... 57 Crossing fords.......................,~............. 57 Passage of military bridges........................................ 58 Passage on ice......................................................... 59 Reversing a battery in a narrow road.......................... 59 Instruction for the preservation of harness................... 60 Transport of batteries by sea..................................... 61 Preparation of transports.......................................... 61 To embark the horses............................................... 61 To embark the battery............................................. 62 To disembark......................................................... 62 In action or preparing for action................................. 63 Replacing killed or disabled horses........................... 65 Order of encampment............................................... 65 X TABLE OF CONTENTS. PART II. TACTICAL INSTRUCTION. PLATES PAGE Basis of instruction..................................................... 67 Composition of the company......................................... 67 Formation of the company............................................ 68 Posts of the officers, non-commissioned officers, etc........... 69 The battery............................................................... 71 General principles....................................... 72 28and29 The battery of manceuvre. Composition of..................... 75 Definitions................................................................. 76 25 and 26 Elementary movements, and their objects........................ 76 Method of giving commands........................................ 78 81 to 88 Bugle or trumpet signals and calls................................. 78 PART III. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. NOS. PAGE ARTICLE I.-METHOD OF INSTRUCTION.................. 1 79 The cannoneer dismounted.............................. 2 80 Elementary instruction........................... 2 80 Position of the cannoneer dismounted............ 3 80 Eyes right-eyes left............................ 4 80 Facing...................................................... 5 80 Marching.................................................. 8 81 To halt..................................................... 9 82 To march backwards................................ 10 82 To mark time when marching....................... 11 82 To change step......................................... 12 82 To face when marching............................... 13 83 Manual of the sabre....................................... 18 84 Inspection of sabre.................................... 23 85 Parade rest...................2....................... 26 86 ARTICLE II.-THE GUN DETACHMENT.................... 28 87 Forming and telling off the detachment............. 30 87 To form in one rank.................................... 32 88 TABLE OF CONTENTS. xi PLATES NOS. PAGE Alignments............................................... 33 88 Direct march in single file.................... 36 89 Change of direction in file..................... 39 90 Oblique march in file................................. 40 90 Direct march in line.................................... 41 90 To halt the detachment................................ 42 90 Wheelings................................................. 43 91 "C in circle................................ 44 91'4 to the right or left........................ 45 91 The reverse.............................................. 46 92 To move forward......................................... 47 92 To form the detachment in two ranks............. 48 92 To march by a flank.................................... 51 93 Marching by a flank, to form line.................. 53 94 Oblique in line........................6......... 54 94 To march to the rear................................ 55 95 To march backwards................................... 56 95 To open and close the ranks...................... 57, 58 96 Execution of the movements at double quick... 61 96 The platoon............................................... 62 97 Sabre exercise........................................... 63 97 To open files......................................... 65 98 To close files.......................................... 92 106 ARTICLE III.-MANUAL OF THE PIECE................... 93 107 Method of instruction.................................... 93 107 Posts of the cannoneers, piece unlimbered......... 95 107 Loading and firing..................................... 96 108 Loading by detail....................................... 110 117 Moving the piece by hand, piece unlimbered.... 111 118 Changing posts......................................... 113 118 Equipments............................................... 114 119 Limbering................................................ 115 119 Posts of the cannoneers, piece limbered............ 118 120 To form the detachment.............................. 119 121 Posts of the detachment.............................. 120 121 Change of posts of detachment..................... 121 121 To post the cannoneers at the piece limbered...... 123 123 Moving the piece by hand, piece limbered.......... 124 123 Unlimbering and coming into action.................. 126 124 Service of the gun with diminished numbers...... 129 124 Supply of ammunition in action....................... 131 126 B Xii TABLE OF CONTENTS. PLATES NOS. PAGE ARTICLI IV.-MIiECHANICAL MANOEUVRES............... 127 Nomenzclature........................................... 127 6 and7 The gun...................................... 132 127 8and9 The carriage............................................. 132 128 10 and 11 The limber......................................... 132 129 12 and 13 The caisson............................................... 132 129 Changing ammunition chests................... 134 131 Changing wheels....................................... 135 132 Dismounting pieces.................................... 136 134 Mounting pieces......................................... 137 135 Carrying pieces........................................... 138 136 Dismounting carriages................................. 139 137 Mounting carriages.................................... 140 138 Righting carriages that have been overturned.. 141 138 Spiking and unspiking cannon and rendering them unserviceable............................... 142 139 ARTICLE V.-THE CANNONEER MOUNTED............... 141 General remarks............................................ 143 141 Elementary instruction................................... 146 142 To bridle the horse..................................... 147 142 To saddle................................................. 148 142 To lead out.......................................... 149 143 Position before mounting............................ 150 144 To mount.................................................. 151 144 Exercise at a halt........................................... 153 145 Position of the cannoneer mounted................ 153 145 Eyes right-eyes left........1................ 154 145 To lengthen the snaffle rein......................... 155 145 To shorten the snaffle rein........................... 156 146 To cross the reins in one hand...................... 157 146 To take the reins in both hands..................... 158 146 Use of the bridle reins and legs................... 159 146 Effect of the reins and legs.......................... 160 147 To march...................................... 161 147 To halt.................................................. 162 148 To turn to the right or left.............................. 163 148 To reverse to the right or left............. 164 148 To oblique.................................................... 165 149 To rein back................................................. 166 149 To dismount....................................... 169 150 To file off..................................................... 170 151 TABLE OF CONTENTS. xii PLATES NOS. PAGB To unsaddle...................................... 171 151 To unbridle....................................... 172 151 Vaulting, the horse unsaddled................. 173 152 Marching..................................................... 152 Riding-house drill....................................... 174 152 19, Fig. 1 To march to the right or left hand.................... 175 152 To halt and to move off.................................. 176 153 To trot, and to resume the walk....................... 177 153 19, Fig. 2 Changes of hand......................................... 178 154 To cross reins in marching............................. 179 154 20, Fig. 1 To turn by cannoneer in marching.................... 180 155 20, Fig. 2 Marching on the same line, to reverse by cannoneer................................................... 181 155 Marching in column, to reverse by cannoneer..... 182 156 To rest........................................................ 184 156 To rest in marching........................................ 185 156 Vaulting, the horses saddled.......................... 186 156 The spur...................................................... 187 157 19, Fig. 3 To mount in two ranks................................... 188 157 19, Fig. 4 To conduct the connoneers to the riding-house.... 190 158 20, Fig. 3 Change of direction in the length of the ridinghouse................................................... 194 159 21, Fig. 1 Change of direction obliquely by cannoneer........ 195 160 21, Fig. 2 To march in a circle....................................... 197 160 21, Fig. 3 To change hand on the circle........................... 198 161 21, Fig. 4 To reunite the cannoneers.............................. 199 161 21, Fig. 5 To form the cannoneers in line................. 200 162 19, Fig. 3 To dismount in two ranks................................ 201 162 Exercise with the stirrups............................... 202 162 20, Fig. 1 To turn to the right or left by cannoneer........... 203 163 20, Fig. 2 The reverse by cannoneer........................ 204 163 To pass from the head to the rear of the column.. 205 163 From a halt to move at a trot................... 206 163 To pass from the trot to the trot out, and to resume the trot.......................................... 207 164 To pass from the trot to the gallop................. 208 164 To passage to the right or left................. 209 165 The curb bridle............................................ 212 166 Position of the bridle hand............................. 213 166 Movements of the bridle hand......................... 214 167 Principles of the gallop...........................:.... 217 168 Exercise at a gallop..................................... 218 169 xiv TABLE OF CONTENTS. PLATES NOS. PAGE Manual of the sabre....................................... 221 170 Sabre exercise.............................................. 227 172 To leap the ditch and the bar........................... 228 172 ARTICLE VI.-THE DETACHMIENT-IIorse Artillery... 174 Forming and telling off the detachment............. 231 174 22 To mount and dismount in two ranks............ 232 174 To form in one rank....................................... 234 175 Alignments.................................................... 235 175 To form in two ranks................................. 241 177 To open and to close the ranks....................... 242 178 To rein back the detachment........................... 244 178 22 To march the detachment by file................ 245 179 Direct march in file...................................... 248 180 Change of direction in file............................... 249 180 To halt and to move off................................... 250 180 Oblique in file............................................... 251 180 To break into single file................................. 253 181 To form in double files.................................... 255 182 To form the detachment in line....................... 256 182 Direct march in line.................................... 260 183 Wheeling..................................................... 268 186 Wheel in circle in single rank........................ 269 187 Wheel in circle in two ranks......................... 272 188 Wheel to the right or left............................. 275 189 Half-wheel to the right or left.................. 276 189 Reverse to the right or left.......................... 277 190 Oblique in line............................................. 279 190 Changes of gait............................................ 281 191 The platoon.................................................. 283 191 ARTICLE VII.-THIE DRIVER............................. 284 193 18 Nomenclature of the harness..................... 285 193 To harness................................................... 286 194 To couple..................................................... 288 195 To mount..................................................... 289 195 Use of the coupling rein and whip.................... 290 196 To march..................................................... 292 196 To turn to the right and to the left................... 294 197 To reverse.......................................... 296 197 To oblique......................................... 297 197 To rein back.................................. 298 198 TABLE OF CONTENTS. XV PLATES NOS. PABG To dismount............................................... 299 198 To file off..................................................... 300 198 To unharness................................................ 301 199 To harness and unharness in two motions...........304-5 200 Maarching............3..................................... 306 200 23, Fig. 1 To break into column to the front..................... 307 200 Change of direction in column......................... 308 201 To halt the column...................................... 309 201 To oblique in column..................................... 310 201 To form line.................................... 311 202 To advance in line........................................ 314 203 To oblique in line.......................................... 315 203 To march to a flank....................................... 316 203 To reverse in marching................................... 317 204 Changes of gait............................................ 318 204 To pass from the rear to the head of the column and the reverse....................................... 320 205 PART IV. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. General Principles.............................................. 322 206 ARTICLE I.-EXERCISE Or SEVERAL DETACHMENTS... 207 Formation of detachments and posts of officers... 323 207 Alignment.................................................. 325 208 To open and close the ranks............................ 326 208 To break into column to the right or left............ 327 208 March in column.......................................... 328 208 To halt the column........................................ 330 209 Change of direction in column......................... 331 209 To march by a flank when in column................ 332 209 Oblique march in column................................ 334 210 Being in column, to form line.......................... 335 210 To form line advancing.................................. 340 212 To advance in line........................................ 341 212 Oblique in line.............................................. 342 213 To change direction in line............................... 343 213 To march by a flank when in line..................... 344 213 To change direction when faced by a flank........ 347 214 2 B2 Xvi TABLE OF CONTENTS. PLATES NOS. PAGE Marching by a flank to form column of detachments.................................................... 48 214 To pass from the march in column to the march by flank................................................ 349 214 Marching by flank to form line........................ 350 214 To form the line or column faced in the opposite direction................................................ 351 215 To march to the rear...................................... 352 215 Posting the detachments with their pieces........... 353 215 Execution of the movements at the double quick.. 354 216 Exercise of the section and of the company........ 355 216 ARTICLE II.-ExXERCISE OF SEVELAL DETACHMENTS. Horse Artillery.................................. 217 Formation of detachments and posts of officers... 356 217 22 To mount and to dismount............................. 359 217 Alignments.................................................. 360 218 To open and close the ranks............................ 361 218 To break into column.............................. 362 218 March in column............................... 365 219 To halt the column............................... 366 219 Change of direction in column......................... 367 219 Oblique march in column................................ 368 220 The column marching, to face it in the opposite direction................................................ 369 220 Being in column, to form line.......................... 370 221 To form line advancing...................... 374 222 To advance in line....................................... 375 223 Oblique in line............................................. 376 223 To change direction in line............................. 377 223 Marching in line, to march in the opposite direction.................................................. 378 224 To march by file........................................... 379 224 Change of direction in file.............................. 380 224 To halt and to move off................................. 381 224 Oblique in file............................................... 382 224 Changes of gait.........3................................ 383 225 To break into single file...................... 384 225 To form double files....................................... 385 225 To form line................................................ 386 225 Marching by a flank, to form column of detachments................................................... 388 225 TABLE OF CONTENTS. XVii PLATES NOS. PAGE In column of detachments, to march by file........ 389 226 Posting the detachments with their pieces.......... 390 226 ARTICLE III.-EXERCISE OF SEVERAL PIECES......... 227 The team..................................... 391 227 Arrangement of the teams.......................... 392 227 23, figs. 1, 2 To break into column.................................. 393 228 To change direction in column................... 394 229 To halt the column..................................... 395 229 Oblique in column...................................... 396 229 To form line.............................................. 397 230 To form line advancing..................... 401 231 To advance in line.................................. 402 231 To halt..................................................... 403 232 To march by a flank................................... 405 232 Oblique in line.................................... 406 233 To reverse................................................ 407 233 Changes of gait.......................................... 408 233 To rest...................................................... 409 233 To file off............................................ 410 234 The piece horsed........................................... 411 234 23, Fig. 3 To enter the park....................................... 412 234 Hitching the teams.................................. 413 235 23, Fig. 4 To unpark................................................. 415 236 To halt the column.................................... 416 237 23, Fig. 5 To wheel................................................. 417 238'23, Fig. 6} To oblique................................................ 418 238 23, Fig. 7 To reverse................................................ 419 238 23,Fig. 8 The about................................................. 420 239 To change direction in column..................... 422 240 The about in column................................... 423 240 Changes of gait........................................ 424 240 To march by a flank............................. 425 241 To rest..................................................... 428 241 To resume the exercise............................. 429 242 To rein back.............................................. 430 242 To dismount whilst marching........................ 431 243 To mount whilst marching........................... 432 243 To park........4.............. 433 243 To unhitch.......................................... 434 244 To leave the park..................................... 435 245 XViii TABLE OF CONTENTS. PLATES NOS. PAGE ARTICLE IV.-THE SECTION............................. 247 Composition of the section.............................. 436 247 Column of pieces.......................................... 437 247 28 Order in line............................................... 438 247 29 Order in battery............................................ 439 248 Posts of officers and non-commissioned officers.... 440 248 Alignments................................................. 441 249 Posts of the cannoneers during the manoeuvres... 444 250 To mount and dismount the cannoneers.............. 445 250 To unpark.......................................... 449 252 30 To form the section....................................... 450 252 To march and to halt.................................... 451 253 Changes of gait............................................ 452 254 35 To change direction....................................... 453 254 31 To march by a flank....................................... 454 255 33 and 34 The oblique................................................. 455 256 The reverse.................................................. 456 257 The about.................................................... 457 257 The countermarch....................................... 458 258 25 Passage of carriages...................................... 460 259 30 To break the section...................................... 461 260 To form the caissons on the flank..................... 462 261 To replace the caissons in rear........................ 463 261 To form the park.......................................... 464 262 Formation in battery...................................... 262 52 In line, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the front........................................ 465 262 In line, to form in battery to the front, by throwing the caissons to the rear............ 466 264 52 In line, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the front.................................... 467 264 53 In line, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the rear.......................................... 468 265 53 In line, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the rear...................................... 469 265 54 In battery, to form in line to the front.......... 470 266 55 In battery, to form in line to the rear.......... 472 267 66 and 67 To march by a flank.................................... 473 268 Movements with the prolonge........................ 476 270 71 Firings....................................................... 477 272 71 To fire to the rear..................................... 478 273 TABLE OF CONTENTS. xix PART V. SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. PLA TES NOS. PAGE ARTICLE I.-GE NERAL PRINCIPLES.,.................... 274 2, 2' 26 } Formations of the battery............................... 479 275 Remarks on the formations............................. 479 275 Measures of the elements composing a battery, and of its formations...................................... 480 279 Manning the battery........................................ 481 279 ARTICLE II.-MOVEMENTS IN COLUMN................... 281 To unpark....................................... 482 281 Formations into line, and battery from column of pieces.................................................... 483 282 To halt........................................................ 484 282 Change of gait.................................................... 485 282 30 To form sections......................................................... 486 283 In column of pieces, to form the caissons on the flank.................................................................. 487 284 To march in column................................................. 488 285 To halt the column................................................. 489 285 To change the gait..................................................... 490 285 31 and 32 To march by a flank................................................. 491 285 33and34 Oblique march..................................... 492 287 Passage of carriages in column.................... 493 288 About in column........................................... 494 289 Countermarch in column................................. 495 289 35 To change direction in column....................... 496 289 30 To diminish the front of a column on the march.. 497 290 In column, with the caissons on the flank, to replace them in front or rear................ 498 291 To form the park.......................................... 499 291 ARTICLE III.-TO PASS FROM THE ORDER IN COLUMN TO THE ORDER IN LINE, AND THE REVERSE.... 292 36 To form forward into line............................... 500 292 87 To form line faced to the rear......................... 501 293 x TABLE OF CONTENTS. PLATES NOS. PAGE 38 To form line to the right or left........................ 502 294 39 To form line on the right or left....................... 503 295 40 To break into column to the front..................... 504 295 To break into column to the rear...................... 505 296 41 To break into column to the right or left........... 506 297 42 To break into column to the front from one flank, to march towards the other........................ 507 297 To break into column to the rear from one flank, to march towards the other,...................... 508 298 To break into column to the front when the battery is marching in line..................... 509 298 To form line advancing................................... 510 299 43 To form double column on the centre section...... 511 300 44 To deploy the double column into line to the front 512 302 To form the double column into line to the right or left........................................... 514 304 ARTICLE IV.-MOVEMENTS IN LINE...................... 306 To advance in line....................................... 515 306 To halt the battery and align it........................ 516 306 Changes of gait............................................. 517 307 45 ind 46 To march by a flank........................................ 518 307 47 and 48 Oblique march...................................... 519 307 Passage of carriages in line........................... 520 308 About in line.......................................... 521 308 Countermarch in line..................................... 522 308 49 To change direction in line............................. 523 308 50 To close intervals in line................................ 525 309 About, or countermarch with diminished intervals 526 310 51 To resume intervals...................................... 527 311 Passage of obstacles...............5.................... 528 311 ARTICLE V.-FORMATIONS IN BATTERY.................. 313 52 In line, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the front................................................ 529 313 In line, to form in battery to the front, by throwing the caissons to the rear....................... 530 313 52 In line, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the front........................................ 531 314 53 In line, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the rear................................................ 532 315 TABLE OF CONTENTS. XXi PLATES NOS. PAGE 53 In line, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the rear........................................... 533 316 54 In battery, to form in line to the front............... 534 316 55 In battery, to form in line to the rear................ 535 317 56 In column, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the front............................................ 536 319 57 In column, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the front................................... 537 319 58 In column, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the rear............................................ 538 320 59 In column, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the rear...................................... 539 321 60, 61 and 62 In column, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the right or left................................... 540 321 63, 64 and 65 In column, with caissons in front, to form in battery to the right or left............................ 541 323 In column, with pieces in front, to form in battery on the right or left................................... 542 324 In column, with caissons in front, to form in battery on the right or left............................ 543 325 To deploy the double column into battery to the front or rear.......................................... 544 325 To deploy the double column into battery to the right or left............................................ 545 326 To pass from the order in battery to the order in column.................................................. 546 327 66 and 67 To march by a flank..................................... 547 327 ARTICLE VI.-FIINGS....................................... 548 330 To fire by battery, half battery, section, and piece................................................... 548 330 To cease firing......................................... 548 330 To move and fire with the prolonge................... 549 331 68 To fire advancing.......................................... 550 331 69 To fire retiring............................................. 551 332 70 Movements for firing in echelon........................ 552 333 Being in echelon, to form line.......................... 553 334 71 To fire to the rear....................................... 554 335 ARTICLE VII.-CIANGES OF FRONT IN BATTERY...... 336 72 Change of front to fire to the right, left wing forward, and the reverse............................... 555 336 xxii TABLE OF CONTENTS. PLATES NOS. PAGE 73 Change of front to fire to the left, left wing forward, and the reverse............................... 556 338 74 Change of front to fire to the left, left wing to the rear, and the reverse................................ 557 339 75 Change of front to fire to the right, left wing to the rear, and the reverse........................... 558 341 76 To pass a defile in front................................. 559 342 77 To pass a defile in rear................................... 560 343 PARADE FOR REVIEW AND INSPECTION. 78 and 79 Review of a battery.................................. 561 344 Review of a battery in connection with other troops................................................... 562 346 To march in review in line or column of half batteries.................................................... 563 347 Officers' salute with the sabre.......................... 564 348 Inspection....................................... 565 348 INSTRUCTION FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. i:P.A.,T 1. ORGANIZATION, MATERIAL, AND SERVICE. ARTICLE FIRST. ARTILLERY AND ITS DUTIES. TEE troops of the artillery are divided into two kinds, viz., Foot Artillery, and light or Field Artillery. To the Foot Artillery belongs the service of siege, sea-coast, garrison, and mountain artillery, rocket batteries, and the artillery duties of the park. To the Field Artillery belongs the service of the batteries which manceuvre with the troops on the field of battle. It is divided into two parts. Horse Artillery, which is generally attached to and manoeuvres with cavalry, the cannoneers being mounted on horseback; and Mounted Artillery, which is gen-;rally attached to and manceuvres with infantry, the cannoneers marching at the sides of their pieces, or, when necessary, mounting the ammunition chests. The Artillery Reserves are composed of horse and mountec batteries in such proportions as the nature of the service requires. The service of batteries assigned to brigades or divisions of cavalry and infantry is special, and, to a great extent, subordinate to the operations of the troops to which they are attached as auxiliaries. The artillery reserve is commanded by a superior A (1) 2 ARTILLERY AND ITS DUTIES. officer of artillery, and constitutes a distinct arm of battle, under the immediate orders of the general commanding. The employment of field artillery, according to the various conditions of service, is a subject of such extent and importance as precludes any attempt to treat of it in this work. It varies with the nature of the theatre of operations; the character of the enemy's defences; the composition of his forces, whether consisting of troops of a single arm or of combinations of the different arms, and according to the discipline, instruction, and numbers of the troops with which it is associated, their composition, and the proportions of the different arms. FIELD ARTILLERY. Field artillery is used to attack and defend the works of temporary fortification; to destroy or demolish material obstacles and means of cover, and thus prepare the way for the success of" other arms; to act upon the field of battle; to break an enemy's line or prevent him from forming; to crush his masses; to dismount his batteries; to follow and support in a pursuit, and to cover and protect a retreat. The effect of field artillery is generally in proportion to the concentration of its fire. It has therefore for its object, not to strike down a few isolated men, and here and there to dismount a gun, but by a combined and concentrated fire to destroy an enemy's cover; to break up his squares and columns; to open his ranks; to arrest his attacks, and to support those which may be directed against him. Mobility being a prime consideration, both upon the march and on the field of battle, the guns and carriages are made as light as is compatible with strength, and the nature of the service they are required to perform. Pieces. The calibre and description of the pieces now in use in the service of the United States, are the 6-pounder and 12-pounder gun, the 12-pounder, 24-pounder, and 32-pounder howitzer, and the 12-pounder light gun, or, as it is sometimes called, gunhowitzer. These are assembled in batteries of six or of eight ARTILLERY AND ITS DUTIES. 3 pieces, on the war establishment, of which four or six are guns, and two are howitzers, and of four pieces, on the peace establishment, of which three are guns and one a howitzer. The 12-pounder guns, and 24-pounder, or 32-pounder howitzer, are associated together in the same batteries, which are called 12-pounder batteries, and the 6-pounder guns and 12-pounder howitzers are associated together in like manner, and called 6-pounder batteries. The 12-pounder light guns are assembled in batteries by themselves. Carriages. Each piece is mounted on a carriage adapted both to the service of the gun and its transportation. Other carriages, called caissons, constructed for the transport of the ammunition, are attached to batteries at the rate of one to each piece in 6-pounder batteries, and two to each piece in 12-pounder batteries. Besides these carriages, a travelling forge, with smiths' and armorers' tools, and stores, for shoeing and ordinary repairs; and a battery wagon for stores, materiel, and the tools of the carriage-maker, wheelwright, saddler, and harness-maker, form parts of the battery. Other battery wagons, forges, spare gun-carriages, etc., required for more extensive and rapid repairs, and to replace injured carriages, accompany the general park. If there is no park, they should accompany the battery whenever it takes the field. The battery of manoeuvre consists of the pieces belonging to the field battery, with an equal number of caissons, all properly equipped, horsed, and manned. Each caisson is permanently attached to a piece, and manceuvres with it. Horses. On the war establishment, or when ordered to march, each carriage of the 6-pounder and light 12-pounder batteries is * This gun is still upon trial. It is not chambered, but can he used both as a gun and howitzer, thus greatly simplifying the ammunition required for a battery. In batteries composed of both guns and howitzers, the fire of one class is often more or less sacrificed to that of the other. This evil is obviated by the use of the light 12-pounder, which will probably be adopted for all mounted batteries, to the exclusion of the others, and be superseded in its turn by rifled cannon of great power and range. 4 ARTILLERY AND ITS DUTIES, drawn by six horses. On the peace establishment, in garrison, four horses only are required. When 12-pounder batteries are in the field or on the road, each piece and caisson of the battery of manceuvre requires eight horses, the other carriages six horses each. Personnel. The number of men required for the service of a battery, including non-commissioned officers and artificers, varies from twenty to thirty per piece, according to circumstances: the number for field service should never be less than twenty-five, even in 6-pounder batteries. They should be intelligent, active, muscular, well-developed, and not less than five feet seven inches high; a large proportion should be mechanics. The number of officers varies from four to six, depending on the number of pieces in the battery. PROPORTION OF FIELD ARTILLERY TO OTHER ARMS. The proportion of field artillery to other arms varies generally between the limits of 1 and 4 pieces to 1000 men, according to the force of the army; the character of the troops of which it is composed; the force and character of the enemy; the nature of the country which is to be the theatre of the war, and the character and object of the war. Similar considerations must regulate the selection of the kinds of ordnance, and the proportions of the different kinds. The value and importance of an efficient artillery increases in proportion as the troops with which it serves are undisciplined and uninstructed. The following principles may be observed in the American service, under ordinary circumstances:1are 12-pdrs. ( guns, of which 4 -pdrs. 4 -,'are.6-pdrs. 3 pieces to 1000 men. are 6-pdrs. I howitzers, of which are 24-pdrs. or 32-pdrs. howizers, ofwhich are 12-pdrs. distributed as follows:For the infantry: 2 pieces to 1000 men-12-pounder, light, or 6-pounder guns, and 12-pounder howitzers in mounted batteries. For the cavalry: 2 pieces to 1000 men-6 pounder guns, and 12-pounder howitzers in batteries of horse artillery. For the reserves: 1 piece to 1000 men —- to ~ in 6-pounder mounted batteries and horse artillery, ~ to. in 12-pounder mounted batteries. QRGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES. 5 ARTICLE SECOND. ORGANIZATION AND EQUIPMENT OF FIELD BATTERIES. THERE are three distinct organizations for field batteries:1. The peace organization, or that for instructions, simply. 2. That for the march, or of preparation for service. 3. That for war. The first organization, that for instruction, requires that the battery of manceuvre, only consisting of four pieces, with their caissons, should be horsed. As the movements are executed with emptv ammunition chests, the number of horses, and especially in the 6-pounder batteries, may be limited to four for each carriage. The battery wagon and forge, although not horsed, should be at all times with the battery, and provided with the stores and tools for service. The additional guns and caissons, with their equipments and harness, to complete the battery to the war establishment, should be kept with it, or in store ready for issue. The second organization, that of preparation for service, requires that the battery of manceuvre, and also the forge and battery wagon, should be kept fully horsed, manned, and equipped. As the ammunition and stores must be transported, the carriages require six horses each, and the artificers, as well as the chiefs of pieces and buglers, should be mounted. On the inland frontiers, or at interior stations, where batteries, when put in motion, must take the road, they should be kept on this organization. The third organization requires that the full battery of six or eight pieces should be equipped in all respects for war. When there is no reserve park with the troops, the additional battery wagon, forge, and other carriages which usually accompany it, with their stores and supplies, and the full campaign allowance A 2 6 ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES. of ammunition, should accompany the battery under charge of its commanders. ORGANIZATION OF A SIX-POUNDER MOUNTED BATTERY. INSTRUCTION. PREPARATION. WAR. 4 pieces. 4 pieces. 6 pieces. Remarks. mI S ~ rml I s i C S 0 0 Captain.................... Lieutenants.... 3................. 4 om'dg sections and caissons. Staffsergeants... 2 2... 2 2... 2 2 First sergeant and qr.mr. sergeant. Sergeants..... 4 4...4 4...6 6 Chiefs of pieces. Corporals.......... 8... 8.. 12.... Gunners and chief of caissons. Artificers.,........ 2...... 4 4. 6 6 Buglers..2....... 2... 2 2... 2 2 Drivers.......... 24 32... 40 60... 52 84 Cannoneers........ 34... 40... 70 Spare......................... 10 4 76 44 4 100 80 5 150 110 In batteries of horse artillery two men and twelve horses per piece (one horse spare) are required in addition to the numbers given in the table. When batteries are ordered on service on the plains, the number of spare draught horses should be increased to one pair for each carriage. ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES. COMPOSITION AND EQUIPMENT OF A BATTERY FOR WAR. The battery is supposed to consist of six pieces. In batteries of eight pieces there are two additional guns, with the materiel required for their service. 12-pdr. 12-pdr. 6-pdr. battery. (light.) battery. F( 12-pounder, mounted............. 4.............. Guns........ 12-pounder, (light,) mounted............. 6......... 6-pounder, mounted.............................. 4 Howitzers.. 24-pounder, mounted.............. 2................. Howitz 12-pounder, mounted................................ 2 Total number of pieces..................... 6 6 6 Caissons.... for guns.8 12 7;I | ^ for howitzers........................ 4........ 2 Total number of caissons.................. 12 12 6 Q _ ___________ A TRAVELLING FORGE................................... 1 1 1 BATTERY WAGON................................. I I L Whole number of carriages................. 20 20 14 F Shot............................... 560 504 400 un Spherical case....................... 224 504 320 AGuns Shells........................................ 168.... I wiCanisters......................... 112 168 80 E-4l Spherical case..........112......... 160;4 Howitzers.. Shells................................. 168....... 120 ~t IL CCanisters....................... 42.........4 832 I Howitz ers.. Spheri~al ~~se....................... L Total number of rounds with a battery.. 1,218 1,344 1,112 For two 32-pounder howitzer carriages, and four) Spherical case...... 84 caissons, the number of rounds of ammunition Shells.................. 112 would be................................................. Canisters........ 14 Total............................................................................. 210 The number of friction primers is fifty per cent. greater than the number of rounds furnished the battery. To provide for contingencies, a small supply of port-fires and slow-match is also furnished with the ammunition. 8 ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES. The campaign allowance of ammunition is double what has been here prescribed, or about 400 rounds per piece, of which about 200 rounds per piece accompany the battery, the remainder being with the reserve parks. FIELD PIECES. The pieces are cast in bronze or gun-metal, and are much less liable to burst than those made of iron. Bronze for cannon, (commonly called brass,) consists of 90 parts of copper and 10 of tin, allowing a variation of 1 part of tin, more or less. It is more fusible than copper; much less so than tin; is harder, less susceptible of oxidation, and much less ductile than either of its components. The specific gravity of bronze is about 8'70, being greater than the mean of the specific gravities of copper and tin; that of iron is about 7'25. The tenacity of bronze is also greater than that of iron. The external forms of the pieces, and their nomenclature, are shown in Plates 6 and 7. The howitzers only are chambered: the 6-pounder gun and 12-pounder howitzer have no handles. The preponderance, is the excess of the weight of the piece in rear of the trunnions over that in front; it is measured by the lifting power, in pounds, which must be applied at the rear of the base ring, to balance the gun when suspended freely on the axis of the trunnions. The true windage, is the difference between the true diameters of the bore and of the ball. ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES. 9 PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS OF FIELD PIECES. GunS. HOWITZERS. 12-pdr. Light 6-pdr. 32-pdr. 24-pdr. 12-pdr. 12-pdr. inches, inches. inces. inches. inches. inches. Diameter of the bore......... 4-62 4.62 3-67 6 4 5 82 4-62 True windage.................. 10 009 015 014 010 Length of bore, (exclusive of chamber,)........... 74 636 575 64- 56-25 4625 Length of bore in diameters. 16- 13-76 15-67 10- 9-66 10 Diameter of the chamber............................. 4-62 4-62 3-67 Length of the chamber............................... 7- 4-75 4-25 Length from rear of base ring to face of muzzle..... 78 66' 60' 75- 65' 53Whole length of the piece... 85- 72-15 65-6 82' 71-2 58-6 Semi-diameter of the base ring........................... 65 55 515 6-9 6 5 Semi-diameter of the swell of the muzzle............... 517 4-25 4125 56 4-875 41 Distance between these two semi-diameters.............. 76-3 65' 58-7 74 75 64-8 52-85 Natural angle of sight.......10 1 1~ 10 10 Distance from rear of base ring to rear of trunnions. 30-7 25-4 23-25 30-7 27-5 23-25 Diameter of the base ring.. 13' 11- 10-3 13-8 13-8 12' Distance between the rimbases.......................... 1 115 95 2 11-5 925 Length of the trunnions.... 3-5 3-25 28 3 3 25 2-8 Diameter of the trunnions.. 4-62 4-2 3-67 4-62 4-2 3-67 Distance from axis of trunnions to face of muzzle... 44.99 38-5 3491 41-99 35-4 27-91 WEIGHT...............pounds. 1,757 1,227 884 1,920 1,318 788 Preponderance......pounds. 60 123,5 33 125 112 51 Ammunition. GUNPOWDER. Gunpowder is composed of nitre, (saltpetre,) charcoal, and sulphur; the proportions of the ingredients and the size of the grain varying with the uses for which it is destined. Powder for the military service is composed of 75 or 76 parts, by weight, of nitre, to 15 or 14 parts of charcoal, and 10 of sulphur. It is glazed, in order to enable it to resist the effects 10 ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES. of shaking in transportation, and of exposure to the moisture of the air. For sporting purposes there are 2 parts more of nitre, and 2 parts less of charcoal, and the grain is very small. Gunpowder burns at a temperature of from 575~ to 600~ Fahr. If made of pure materials, well glazed, and kept in proper casks in a dry magazine, it absorbs less than 1 per cent. of moisture in from 10 to 15 years. If freely exposed to air saturated with moisture, it will absorb 2 per cent. or more in 24 hours. DENSITY OF GUNPOWDER. No. of grans Weight of 1 cubic foot. Specific No.of grains _______. Cubic inches SIZE OF GRAIN. grait. ofpowderin in lb.loose. 4"' -V' 10 grs. Troy Loose. Shaken. OZ.. OZ. Cannon................ 1,912 150 929 1,039 30Musket................... 983 1,,100 896 1,012 30.8 Rifle...............6............ 6,000 900 1,060 30 7 Sporting................. 2,012 73,000 1,047 1,197 26-5 Powder, loose.......... 900................................................ Powder, shaken....... 1,000.............................................. WATER.................. 1,000................ 998,07.......... PROOF OF GUNPOWDER. The projectile force of gunpowder is ascertained by means of the cannon pendulum, and the musket pendulum. The apparatus shows the initial velocity of a ball fired from a cannon or a musket with the ordinary service charge. In proving cannon powder, the initial velocity of a ball of medium weight and windage, with a charge of one-fourth its weight of powder, should be:From a 24-pounder garrison gun, not less than 1600 feet. From a 12-pounder field gun, not less than 1550 feet. From a 6-pounder field gun, not less than 1500 feet. In proving small-arm powder, the initial velocity of a musket ball, with a charge of 120 grains, should be:With musket powder, not less than 1500 feet. With rifle powder, not less than 1600 feet. With fine sporting powder, not less than 1800 feet. ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES. 11 CHARGES OF POWDER. FOR GUNS. FOR HOWITZERS. RIND. 12-pdrs. 6-pdrs. 32-pdrs. 24-pdrs. 12-pdrs. lbs. lbs. bs. lbs. lbs. For shot.............................. 25 1-25. For spherical case................. 25 125 325 25 125 For canister.......................... 2- 1' 2-5 2- 1 For shells. small charge.................. 2-5 2.. For shells... large charge....................... 325 25......... fixed................. 2-5......................... The same ammunition is used for the 12-pounder and light 12-pounder guns. The charges are contained in cartridge bags, made of woollen material fr free fom any mixture of cotton, and of sufficiently close texture to prevent the powder from sifting through. PROJECTILES. (PLATE 1.) There are four kinds of projectiles used in field service, viz.: the solid or round shot, the canister, the shell, and the spherical case shot. The projectile is attached to a block of wood called a sabot. For the guns and the 12-pounder howitzer, the cartridge and the projectile are attached to the same sabot, making together a round of fixed ammunition. For 32-pounder and 24-pounder howitzers, the projectile is separate from the charge, and the cartridge is attached to a block of wood called a cartridge block. The solid shot is spherical, and its weight in pounds is used to designate the calibre of the gun to which it belongs. The canister consists of a tin cylinder, attached to a sabot and filled with cast-iron shot. These shot vary in diameter, and of course in weight, with the calibre and description of the piece. Canisters for guns contain 27 shots each; those for howitzers contain 48 shots each. They are packed in sawdust in four tiers: the lower tier rests on a rolled iron plate, which is placed on the 12 ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES. sabot; and the canister is closed with a sheet-iron cover. The canister takes its designation from that of the piece for which it is prepared. The shell is a hollow shot, with such thickness of metal as enables it to penetrate earth works, wooden buildings, etc., without breaking. For service it is charged with powder, and bursts with great force. Fire is communicated to the charge by means of a fuze, inserted in the hole through which the powder is introduced; the time of the explosion being regulated by the.preparation of the fuze. The shell is designated by the weight of the solid shot of the same diameter. CHARGING SHELLS. 12-pounder. Charges. 32-pdr. 24-pdr. Gun. Howitzer lb. oz. lb. oz. lb. oz. lb. oz. P. to fill the shell....... 1 5 1 08 08 Powder required for service charge.. 1 0 0 12 0 7 0 7 Rifle or musket powder is used in preference to cannon powder. The Shrapnell, or spherical ease shot, is a hollow cast-iron shot forming a case which is filled with musket balls. Melted sulphur or resin is poured in to fill up the interstices and secure the balls in their positions. After this is solidified, a portion of the contents is bored out and the vacant cylindrical space filled with powder, the amount of the charge being only sufficient to rupture the case, which has less thickness of metal than the shell, and to disperse the contents. Fire is communicated. to the charge by the means employed for exploding the shell. The Shrapnell shot, so called from the name of its inventor, an officer of the British artillery, produces the same effect as the canister, and can be used for much greater distances. It takes its designation from that of the piece. Plate I for Howiters. )'~- c.24 12 prdr.I I!... Hwie Ccurtiter. C. n' ter. I,-. —..-. —l — t,.% "I K ^ 8. _iV.~,. \0 < A,'CzAeVio.7z of Zeft side.IDe. 3 4 /(/3M\\', ( "',,~ -_. 2. Sid raoi do. 15 3. Farzt foot boabrd do. 4. Rea. foo0t board do. 5. Bolster for fi7ont fioot board o. 6. Alre body. 7. Midlde assezinbig, bar/(IJron 2 ~ 0 8. Siear a sse ii7eN ba7- do. 9. Carrizale 7hook. 4. 1_ 1 le. 10. Spa-e wh eel al e. 11. Chai l d toggle fo do. 12. Lode chain n o 15~ 17 bridle (ron/ toK T Xo o 13. lznette-. e - 0 0 14. Recy platel cho~n~ ain 15. I pezL for spare pole. 16. Spare pole c7ix,. r 7 1I7 ain. bZZt for topggre pikr. i _ 17. Key pl ate a7d ch7ai, for 2 0 0 shoveZ haLacl. p - 19. Staples for tool hazc. i 0 20. Slo-t for Tic7dae.' 21.,, Axe., Nomenclature______ Pe 13. ~ I o I, ^ // ^ ^ ^^^^^~~~~~' I t ^^~T'"^I^ E~'~'~~/^ ^ ^ 1. Lunette. 2. Stock. ck / 3. Guard plate. 4. Lock dai. 5. do. Bridl. 14 14- 14 14 6.. do. Hook.,11 7. Stdf (irorLj 11 8. Sideradlo. rai _i: 10. Hinges. r. Coer boars. 17 7 12. Cover,stranp afnd rnbtcie. n 1 13. Boto r. ( 13; ~ ) a _ _i.14. -! o 12 1 7-5foay Ra. I a 6. do. d. C/huuI s. 17. Sides of Forage&Rack. t 18. Brs of do19. Side Boards. 20. Sic Stays. ___________ ^_____________________________________________________________________________________________ -~Noni-_enclature t __ P r i K -. ~- ------ - - iii - - - - - - - -.i~ -,: $ ~2c i n,. } $ i $.? ^ ^^ ^^^ ~\ \I ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ I fRoo' of tle bellows hottse. 2,t ds G''. t 6-' 3 Gir7de7ti to stupport belt.ows. 4 Bellovws. 5 Ribs or' do. 6 Side ratil. 7 Windpipe. 57 Air bac/k. 9 9 Baclk of fiteplace. _ _ 10'eire pl ce. 1l Stock. 51 8 12 Stock' stirrttps. O'~6 1 _l) -.3 Coal box1. 14 Handles. I D — ~ ~~ 15, TlU'tbutckle anid ff.asp. 7/ 16 BeIlou's HfooAk. 17 trflcrtaltn, 1 support'\\ / tfoi l-ellows pole. 1 18 VFce. [1 1) -Prop. Lid of the; coat bo.c. / 2 Handles of do. 3 Hfin/ges of do._ I 4 Roo' bocards. 5 Bows. 6 ]En'd boards..7 fJelloS ----— ows. ~~'~ ~41 —----- 8 Jring fes. ^ Ji nges.bocrrz~s. W o O Q llrl__ _ ___= ___5lJlr= "=_==__________ =1'; I to-','1 9 BJottom b 7bo ds o. it) ffIiolpipe. I 2 10 [lD10l'i1e i Arirba7ck;/.- =l 1- 4 7', 12 J''ireplace... m' 13 Bellowe /look. b /4 Faicruoc. ______i o o o 15 Jibok. aind staph; for ---- _ —--------- ------------ cilr/yiot~ bello s' pole. 17 16' ZitUette. ~ ~i 17 Lock cltt/ai hook. I'.,. 18 Wzeel fzurt('d plates. I_ Noiencl' a.tL.:e Plate 18. 2A6f i tl 1. if f Cheek _2race hook. 1 c H1 alter. Br"idle. I Bit. curb /conistsng of bar withfl aport77zoct/.t icheekT I Crowa7piece.' Crotvn piece.. piecers,iLnd ctrb c7hai7n.)9 Collarancfl linizexwith,' 2 Cheek strap. Cheek strap. joi t, loops ~ or trace tlzsx. 20 Trace tzgs acrl sa/fe. 3 Browv band.. Brow band. ft:'7l ace hook-. 12 7race,. 13 TraLcr chainTZ. Saf.e,. 4 NVo.se bttnd. 2 -7zroat lozs7.. 175 Brearyt strap. 16 Saddle. 17 H3arie.strap. 18 Collar 5 Ch,. 7it, tOJap. Bit. strap. 19 Sliding loop. 20 Chlainc ancd toggle-. 21 Girth. 6 TPiroova-vtiatp. 22 Reins. 2 22 Loia7 strcp. 23 _l-zp strap. 24 -Breech, strap. 7 T7hroa It h. \l 8 Hitching strap. f I (Crltlper. 25 Back strap. 26 T'he body. 27 7The dock.} 28. Trus.s7tg strap..29 Valis-ce sad^dZe. 3 0 Va&ise,. 3 Valise, strap. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 141 ARTICLE FIFTH. THE CANNONEER MOUNTED. General Remarks. 143. The object of this part is to instruct the cannoneer in the management of his horse at all gaits, and will be best attained by a gradual and constant application of the principles of the drill. All the cannoneers of mounted batteries, as well as of horse artillery, should be thoroughly instructed in this part, as it is an indispensable preparation for the duties of a non-commissioned officer as well as for those of a driver. 144. It should be carefully impressed upon the men that the horse may be made gentle and obedient by patience, kindness, and fearlessness; that punishment is only to be resorted to when it cannot be avoided, and then only administered immediately after the commission of the offence; and that nothing should ever be done to the horse in anger. Restlessness and impatience frequently arise from exuberance of spirits or playfulness. When restless, the horse should be held until he becomes calm; when submissive after punishment, he should be treated kindly. The cannoneers should endeavor to inspire him with confidence, and he should be gradually accustomed to warlike sounds-firing, beating of drums, etc. The most quiet and best instructed horses will be chosen for the first lessons to recruits. 145. All mounted exercises should be commenced and ended at a walk. Horses cannot be taken with impunity from a state of rest in the stable and be at once subjected to the severe and rapid exercises required in the drills and battery manceuvres. It is almost equally injurious to place them, exhausted and heated 142 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. after great exertions, in a stable; especially in cold weather or where the stables are liable to have currents of air passing through them. ELEMENTARY INSTRUCTION. 146. This should be carefully imparted, if practicable, to the men singly. Under no circumstances should more than four recruits be assigned to one instructor at the same time. They will then be placed in one rank, three yards apart. The horses are taken in the stables or at the pickets, the cannoneers unarmed. TO BRIDLE THE HORSE. 141. The instructor indicates the parts of the bridle as follows, and explains their uses:BRIDLE: crown piece; throat lash; brow band; cheek straps; bit; bar of bit; curb rein; curb chain or strap; snaffle rein. He then commands: BRIDLE. The reins are taken in the right, the crown piece in the left hand; the horse is approached on the near (or left) side; the reins slipped over his head, and left resting on his neck; the cannoneer then takes the crown piece in the right hand, the left side of the bar of the bit resting on the two front fingers of the left hand; brings the bridle head in front of and slightly below its proper position; inserts the thumb of his left hand into the side of the mouth; presses open the lower jaw; inserts the bit by raising the crown piece; passes his left hand under the brow band, passes the ears under the crown piece, commencing with the right ear; arranges the forelock; secures the throat lash and then the curb strap, taking care not to make them set too closely. There should be at least three finger's breadths between the throat lash and the jaws. TO SADDLE. 148. The different parts of the saddle are indicated as follows:-The SADDLE: pommel; cantle; seat; skirts;flaps, or inner SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 143 skirts; girths, and straps; stirrups; stirrup leathers; CRUPPER: strap and loop; BREAST STRAP. He then commands: SADDLE. The cannoneer approaches the horse on the left side, lays the blanket properly folded on his back, the edges on the left side; then seizes it at the withers with the left, at the loins with the right hand; slides it once or twice, from front to rear, to smooth the hair, taking care to raise it in carrying it forward, so as not to brush back the hair. The blanket should be so arranged as to project slightly beyond the saddle, both in front and rear. The breast strap, crupper, and stirrups, being crossed over the saddle, he seizes it at the pommel with the left hand, at the cantle with the right, places it gently on the horse's back, bringing it from the direction of the croup; places it a little in rear, that the crupper may be put on without drawing it back, lets down the crupper and breast strap; steps to the rear, passes the end of the crupper under the dock and buckles it, or passes the tail through the crupper loop, taking care that none of the hair remains under it; steps to the right of the horse, seizes the pommel with the right, the cantle with the left hand, raises and carries it forward without moving the blanket, seeing at the same time that there are no straps caught under it; lets down the girth, running it through the loop of the false martingale, if one is used; then lets down the right stirrup; returns to the left of the horse, sees that the blanket is smooth, and does not compress the withers, which is prevented by raising it slightly over this part; buckles the girth and the breast strap, and lets down the left stirrup. TO LEAD OUT. 149. The horse being saddled and bridled, at the command LEAD OUT, the cannoneer conducts him to the exercise ground. The reins are passed over the neck, and rest on the pommel of the saddle; the cannoneer is on the left of the horse, holds the reins with the right hand, 6 inches from the mouth, the nails under, the hand elevated and firm, to prevent the horse starting. 144 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 150. Position before mounting. At the command STAND TO HORSE, given by the instructor, the cannoneer, standing opposite the lower jaw, on the left of the horse, assumes the position prescribed in No. 3, excepting that he holds the reins with the right hand, about 6 inches from the bit, nails downward. TO MOUNT. 151. The instructor commands: 1. PREPARE TO MOUNT. 1 pause; 2 motions. At this command, unhook the sabre, when worn; place the right foot 3 inches in rear of the left, make a face and a half to the right, on both heels, keeping the right foot in front; let go the right rein, slide the right hand along the left rein, take two steps, right foot first, and face to the left on the point of the left foot, so as to bring the right side towards the horse's flank; place the right foot 3 inches in rear of the left, seize the bight of the reins with the right hand, and place the little finger of the left hand between them, back of the hand towards the horse's head; run the left hand down the reins to the horse's neck, about 12 inches from the saddle, and with the right hand draw the reins through the palm of the left, until the hand has a light and equal feeling of the horse's mouth; then let the bight of the reins fall on the off side; grasp firmly a lock of the mane, and the reins with left hand, and let fall the right by the side. Two. Seize the left stirrup leather, just above the eye of the stirrup, with the right hand; raise the left foot and insert it as far as the ball, or about one-third the foot, and place the right hand on the off side of the cantle of the saddle. 2. MOUNT. 1 pause; 2 motions. At the command MOUNT, spring from the right foot, holding firmly to the mane, and keeping the saddle steady with the right hand; bring the heels together, the knees resting firmly against the saddle, the body erect. SCHOOI OF TI-E PIECE. 145 Two. Place the right hand on the pommel to support the body; pass the right leg extended over the croup of the horse without touching; let the body come gently down into the saddle; let go the mane, take one rein in each hand, and insert the right foot in its stirrup without the aid of hand or eye. The instructor then causes the stirrups to be crossed over the horse's neck, the left one over the right. 152. Before commanding the mount, the instructor will explain the details of the movement, and will allow but a short interval between the first and second parts of its execution; because if the cannoneer were to remain too long on the stirrup the horse would become restive. EXERCISE AT A HALT. 153. Position of the cannoneer moninted. The buttocks bearing equally on the saddle, and well forward; the thighs embracing equally the horse, and stretched only by their own weight and that of the legs; the legs free and falling naturally; the loins supported without stiffness; the upper part of the body at ease, free, and erect, shoulders equally thrown back, arms falling naturally, head erect and easy; one rein of the snaffle in each hand, the fingers closed, the thumb along each rein, the wrists as high as the elbow, and 6 inches apart, the fingers turned towards each other, the upper extremity of the reins leaving the hand on the side of the thumb. EYES RIGHT-EYES IEFT. 154. As prescribed in No. 4, for the cannoneer dismounted. TO LENGTHEN THE SNAFFLE REIN. The instructor commands: Lengthen left (or right) REIN. 1 pause; 2 motions. 155. At the command REIN, bring the wrists towards each other without turning them in; seize the left rein with the thumb and first finger of the right hand, I inch from the left thumb. 10 N 146 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. Two. Half open the left hand, and allow the reins to slip until the thumbs touch; close the left hand and replace the wrists. TO SHORTEN THE SNAFFLE REIN. 156. The instructor commands: Shorten left (or right) REIN. 1 pause; 2 motions. At the command REIN, bring the wrists towards each other without turning them in; seize the left rein with the thumb and first finger of the right hand, so that the thumbs touch. Two. Half open the left hand, elevate the right hand, and suffer the rein to slip until the thumbs are I inch apart; close the left hand and replace the wrists. The right rein is lengthened and shortened on the same principle. TO CROSS THE REINS IN ONE HAND. 157. The instructor commands: In left (or right) hand-cross REINS. At the command REINS, turn in the left wrist, the nails downward; at the same time bring the wrist opposite to the middle of the body, half open the left hand, place in it the part of the rein that was in the right; reclose the left hand, and let the right fall to the side. The reins are crossed in the right hand upon the same principle. TO TAKE THE REINS IN BOTH HANDS. 158. The instructor commands: Separate-REINS. At the command REINS, half open the hand which contains them, seize with the other, nails downward, that part of its rein which the other hand had held, and replace the wrists 6 inches apart. USE OF THE BRIDLE REINS AND LEGS. 159. The reins serve to prepare the horse for the move SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 147 ments, to guide, and to halt him; their action should be gradual, and in harmony with that of the legs. In using them, the arms should be used with suppleness, and their movements should extend from the wrist to the shoulder. In riding, the hand ought not to move with the body, but should be kept steady. The legs serve to make the horse advance, to support him, and to aid him in executing changes of direction. When the cannoneer wishes to make his horse advance, he should gradually close his legs behind the girth, proportioning their effect to the sensibility of the horse. In doing this he must be careful not to open out, nor to raise his knees, which must be kept supple. As soon as the horse obeys, the cannoneer will gradually relax his legs. EFFECT OF THE REINS AND LEGS. 160. The cannoneer, in elevating the wrists and closing the legs, holds his horse in hand or gathers him; this is preparatory to all movements. By again elevating the wrists he slackens the pace; and by repeating the movement he stops the horse, or reins him back. The wrists should be raised without curving them, and at the same time they should be drawn slightly towards the body. In opening the right rein and closing the right leg, the cannoneer turns his horse to the right. To open the right rein, the right wrist is carried, without turning it, more or less to the right, according to the sensibility of the horse. The horse is turned to the left on the same principles. By lowering slightly the wrists, the horse is at liberty to move forward. Closing the legs determines the movement. TO MARCH. 161. The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, forward. 2. MARCH. At the first command, gather the horse. At the command MARCH, lower the wrists, closing the legs at the same time until the horse obeys, when the wrists will be gradually replaced. 148 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. TO HALT. 162. The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers. 2. HALT. At the first command, the horse is gathered without slackening his pace. At the command HALT, elevate the wrists by degrees, bring them towards the body, and hold the legs near, to keep tho horse straight and to prevent his backing. When the horse does not obey, cause him to feel successively the effect of each rein, according to his sensibility. The horse having obeyed, gradually replace the wrists and legs. TO TURN TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 163. The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. At the first command, gather the horse. At the command MARCH, open the right rein, and close progressively the right leg. In order not to turn the horse too short, perform the movement in a quarter of a circle of 3 yards. The movement being almost completed, diminish the effect of the rein and the right leg, supporting the horse at the same time with the left rein and leg to terminate the movement. At the command HALT, hold the horse straight in the new direction. TO REVERSE TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 164. The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) reverse. 2. AMARCH. 3. HALT. This movement is executed upon the same principles as the turn to the right or to the left, with this difference: that the horse should pass over a semicircle of 6 yards and halt faced to the rear. The instructor should place himself on foot, at the shoulder SCHOOL OF TIE PIECE. 149 of the horse, and describe the curves prescribed in this and the preceding number before causing the cannoneer to execute the movements. TO OBLIQUE. 165. The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. This movement is executed according to the principles prescribed for a turn to the right or left, (No. 163,) taking care that the movement of the reins and left leg are called into action in sufficient time to prevent more than a half turn being executed. The object being to give the cannoneers the first idea of the oblique direction, great exactness will not at first be required. TO REIN BACK. 166. The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, backwards. 2. MARCH. 3. Cannoneers. 4. HALT. At the command MARCH, keep a firm seat, elevate the wrists, and close the legs. As soon as the horse obeys, lower and elevate successively the wrists. If the horse throws his haunches to the right, close the right leg; if to the left, close the left leg. If these means are not sufficient to replace the horse in his proper position, open the rein on the side towards which he throws his haunch, supporting him at the same time with the other rein. At the command HALT, hold a light rein, and keep the legs near. 167. At first the horse should not be backed more than three or four paces. If necessary, the instructor, dismounted, will place himself before the horse, take a rein in each hand, and by moving the wrists, cause the bit to act. If the horse refuses to obey, the reins being held in one hand, the instructor with the other will touch his forelegs gently with the whip, and caress him as soon as he obeys. 168. In executing the foregoing movements, the instructor N2 150 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. will not at first require that they be performed together by the cannoneers under instruction, but will see that each executes his own correctly, rectifying the positions before passing from one movement to another. TO DISMOUNT. 169. The instructor causes the stirrups to be let down, and commands: 1. Prepare to DISMOUNT. At this command pass the right rein of the snaffle into the left hand, the extremity of the reins leaving the hand on the side of the thumb, seize the reins above and near the left thumb with the right hand, the nails downward; slide the left hand down the reins to the horse's neck, about 12 inches from the saddle, and holding the reins in that hand so as to feel the horse's mouth lightly, grasp with it a lock of the mane; drop the bight of the reins, and, placing the right hand on the pommel, take the right foot from the stirrup, keeping the body erect. 2. DISMOUNT. 1 pause; 3 motions. At the command DISMOUNT, rise upon the left stirrup, pass the right leg extended over the croup of the horse, without touching him, and bring the right heel to the side of the left, the body well sustained, at the same time placing the right hand on the cantle. Two. Lower the body gently until the right foot touches the ground; remove the left foot from the stirrup, and place it by the right, keeping the body erect. Let go the mane; pass the bight of the reins over the pommel of the saddle with the right hand, which then seizes the left rein; let go the rein with the left hand, and drop the hand by the side. THREE. Face to the left, take two steps, left foot first, slip the right hand along the left rein, and take the position of STAND TO HORSE. In the detail and execution of the first and second motions of the dismount, the instructor will conform to what is directed in No. 152 for mounting. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 151 TO FILE OFF. 170. The instructor commands: 1. By the right, (or left,) file off. 2. MARCH. At the first command, hook up the sabre, when one is worn. At the command MARCH, the cannoneer on the right steps off with the left foot, leading his horse to the front. He moves four yards, turns to the right, and marches in the new direction, holding at the same time the hand high and firm. Each man executes successively the same movement when the one who precedes him has moved four yards to the front. They conform to the same principles to file off to the left. TO UNSADDLE. 11I. At the command UNSADDLE, the cannoneer unbuckles the breast strap and girth; steps to the right side, frees the girth from the loop of the false martingale, turns up the girth and breast strap after wiping them; throws over the right stirrup; carries the saddle a little back, and frees the tail from the crupper; throws over the left stirrup; seizes the pommel with the left, the cantle with the right hand, removes the saddle and places it on its peg; takes off the blanket, doubles it with the wet side inwards; lays it on the saddle, passing the crupper over it, and attaching it to the breast strap. TO UNBRIDLE. 172. At the command UNBRIDLE, loose the curb strap and throat lash; slip the reins with the right hand to the crown piece, and then with both hands carefully disengage the ears, and let the bit drop out of the mouth by lowering the crown piece along the forehead. The manner of arranging the bridle and halter heads, when both are used at the same time, will depend upon the kind of halter head used; the mode in each case will be prescribed by the captain commanding the battery. 152 SCHOOL OF TIE PIECE. VAULTING: THE HORSE UNSADDLED. 173. At the command MOUNT, the cannoneer seizes the mane with the left hand; holds the reins of the snaffle with the right hand, which he places on the withers, the thumb to the left, the fingers to the right; raises himself lightly on the two wrists, the body straight; passes the right leg extended over the croup of the horse without touching him, seats himself gently, and takes the left rein in the left hand. At the command DISMOUNT, he passes the left rein of the snaffle into the right hand, which he then places on the withers; seizes the mane with the left hand, raises himself gently on both wrists; passes the right leg extended over the croup of the horse without touching him, brings the right thigh near the left, the body straight, and comes lightly to the ground. MARCHING. Riding-house Drill. 174. The instructor may now unite eight cannoneers, but not more. They are placed on the same line, 3 yards apart. After mounting, the stirrups are crossed over the horse's neck. Two corporals, or instructed men, designated conductors, are placed, one on the right, the other on the left; they use their stirrups. When there is no riding-house, a ground will be laid out as a substitute. It should be rectangular, about 100 yards long by 33 broad, the entrance at the ends. The cannoneer marches to the right hand, when he has the right side towards the interior of the riding-house. He marches to the left hand, when the left side is towards the interior. TO MARCH TO THE RIGHT (OR LEFT) HAND. 175. (PLATE 19, Fig. 1.) The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 153 At the first and second commands, the cannoneers turn to the right, as prescribed in No. 163. At the command FORWARD, they lower the wrists, and, closing the legs, march straight forward and follow the conductor, who enters the riding-house, turning, when he reaches the extremity of it, to the right or left, as directed. He turns at the angles without further orders. If the turn is to the right, the cannoneers are marching to the right hand; if to the left, they are marching to the left hand. They keep the distance between them of 4 feet from head to croup. The instructor follows, keeping on the inside of the track; observes that the seat is not deranged, and that the men conform with suppleness to the motions of their horses. Passing from one to another he rectifies their positions successively, so as to instruct without confusing them. TO HALT AND TO MOVE OFF. 176. The cannoneers marching in column on one of the long sides, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers. 2. HALT. At the second command, the cannoneers halt. To resume the march, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, forward. 2. MARcH. The men will take care not to incline the body too much forward at the moment of stopping, and not to lean back at the moment of starting. When they halt the instructor will rectify their positions. TO TROT. 177. After the cannoneers become habituated to the movement of the horse, the instructor commands: 1. Trot. 2. M. ARCH. At the first command, given when the column is upon one of the long sides of the riding-house or ground, the horse is gathered. At the command MARCH, lower the wrists a little, and close the legs gradually, until the horse obeys; when the wrists and legs will be replaced. The trot is at first at a moderate gait; the 154 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. men must sit steady and easily, and maintain the solidity of their positions by the weight of the body, allowing it to conform to the movements of the horse, without lounging, and without bearing upon the reins. To resume the walk, the instructor commands: 1. Walk. 2. MARCH. At the command Walk, gather the horse. At the command MARCH, gradually raise the wrists; at the same time close the legs, to prevent the horse stopping. As soon as he walks, replace the wrists and legs. All changes of gait should be made gradually. CHANGES OF HAND. 178. (PLATE 19. Fig. 2.) When the cannoneers have marched some time to the right hand, (or to the left hand,) to make them change hands without stopping, the instructor commands: 1. File right, (or left.) 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. At the command MARCH, the conductor turns to the right; at the command FORWARD, he moves straight forward, crossing the riding-house, and followed by the other cannoneers, until he arrives within 2 yards of the opposite track, when the instructor commands: 1. File left, (or right.) 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. At the command MARCH, the conductor turns to the left; and at the command FORWARD, follows the track. The other cannoneers turn upon the same ground. The changes of hand are executed both at the walk and the trot. TO CROSS REINS IN MARCHING. 179. The instructor causes the reins to be crossed and separated, as prescribed in No. 157 and No. 158. The cannoneers will avoid abruptness in the motions and not change the gait. The reins being crossed, in order to turn to the right, carry the SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 155 hand forward and to the right; to turn to the left, carry the hand forward and to the left; the nails always downward. TO TURN BY CANNONEER IN MARCHING. 180. (PLATE 20, Fig. 1.) The cannoneers marching in column, and having arrived about the middle of one of the long sides, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. At the first command, gather the horse. At the command MARCH, each cannoneer executes a turn to the right, and at the command FORWARD, moves straight to the front. When they arrive within 2 yards of the opposite track, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. When each cannoneer turns as directed, and moves forward on the track. The same movements, when repeated, bring the cannoneers to their original order. MARCHING ON THE SAME LINE, TO REVERSE BY CANNONEER. 181. (PLATE 20, Fig. 2.) The cannoneers having turned to the right, as just explained, and being near the opposite track, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) reverse. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. At the first command, gather the horse. At the second, each man executes the reverse, and at the command FORWARD, moves directly to the front. The column is again formed on the track by giving the command: Cannoneers, by the right (or left)flank —MARCH-FORWARD. 156 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. MARCHING IN COLUMN, TO REVERSE BY CANNONEER. 182. The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) reverse. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD, Which is executed by each cannoneer, as already prescribed. 183. The object of the different turns and reverses being to habituate the cannoneers to the control of their horses, they will be executed at first at a walk only, the turns and reverses to the right being executed during the instruction to the right hand; and those to the left during the instruction to the left hand. After the cannoneers are accustomed to the movements, the instructor causes them to be executed without regard to the change of hand. TO REST. 184. The instructor causes the turn by cannoneer to be executed to the right, or left. When the column is near the middle of a long side of the riding-house, gives the command HALT; when they are clear of the track, dismounts them, and commands REST. To terminate the drill, the stirrups are let down, the men dismounted, and ordered to file off. TO REST IN MARCHING. 185. The instructor sometimes commands REST, whilst the cannoneers are marching, in order to calm the horses after a quick pace, and to relieve the men who may become fatigued. The cannoneers then relax themselves a little, but without lounging in the saddle, changing the pace, or losing the distance. The conductors regulate the march at all times. 186. During the rests, the instructor exercises the men in vaulting on and from their horses, without commands. To leap to the ground: the cannoneer holding the reins as prescribed in No. 173, seizes with the left hand a lock of the mane, the fingers well closed; places the right hand upon the SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 15 pommel; raises himself upon the wrists; brings the right thigh to the side of the left; remains an instant in this position, and descends lightly to the ground. To leap upon the horse, he seizes the mane with the left hand; places the right hand, which holds the reins, upon the pommel; springs quickly, raising himself on both wrists; remains an instant in this position, and places himself lightly in the saddle. THE SPUR. 187. For the remaining portion of the riding-house drill from twelve to sixteen cannoneers may be united. The horses are saddled and in the snaffle. All the movements are explained in detail, and executed by the right. They are executed by the left, on the same principles. After the cannoneers begin to execute them with facility, they are made to change their horses daily, that they may become habituated to the management of different ones. The cannoneers are placed in two ranks, the ranks at 2 feet distance; the horses in each rank 1 foot from each other; the conductors of the right or left being first placed in position to serve as the bases of formation for each rank. They are then told off as prescribed in No. 30, calling off as high as No. 8, and beginning again in the rear rank as No. 1, so that the odd numbers are in the rear, the even numbers in the front rank. The instructor then causes them to mount. TO MOUNT IN TWO RANKS. 188. (PLATE 19, Fig. 3.) At the command Prepare to mount, Nos. 2 and 6, and the conductor on the left of the front rank, move 2 yards to the front; Nos. I and 5, and the conductor on the left of the rear rank, move 2 yards to the rear, keeping opposite their intervals, and regulating by the right. All unhook their sabres when they are worn, and the mounting is then completed as prescribed in No. 151. The instructor then causes the stirrups to be crossed, and commands: Fornm RANKS. To 158 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. At the command RANKS, NOS. 2, 3, 6, and 7 stand fast, and the conductors form on them. Nos. 1, 4, 5, and 8 enter the intervals of their ranks without jostling, and without precipitation. The rear rank being formed, closes to the distance of 2 feet from the front. 189. The instructor then explains the use of the spur. If the horse does not obey the legs, the spur should be employed. It is only necessary to use it occasionally, but always vigorously, and at the moment the horse commits the fault. To use the spurs, hold firmly to the horse by the legs; turn the toes a little out; give the rein slightly, and press firmly with the spurs behind the girth, without moving the body, until the horse obeys. HTe should never be made to feel the spurs unless there is a necessity for it, and then both should be applied at the same moment. TO CONDUCT THE CANNONEERS TO THE RIDING-1IOUSE. 190. (PLATE 19, Fig. 4.) The instructor commands: 1. By the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. At the first command, gather the horse. At the command MARCIH, the cannoneer on the right of each rank executes a turn to the right, and moves forward at the third command, the one of the rear rank approaching in marching to within 1 foot of the one in the front rank. This movement is executed by all the other files in succession. PLATE 19, Fig. 5. In entering the riding-house, the instructor marches the column parallel to the long sides; and when its head is near the middle, commands: 1. By file, right and left. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. The conductor of the front rank turns to the left, that of the rear rank to the right; when they are within 2 yards of the track, the instructor commands: File right-MARC — FORWARD. The two columns then march to the right hand, and at the same pace; the cannoneers preserve the distance of 4 feet from head to croup. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 159 The conductor of the rear rank regulates his pace by that of the conductor of the front rank, so that they shall arrive at the opposite angles of the riding-house at the same time. The instructor sees that the cannoneers move at a free and even pace; that they keep their horses straight; that they preserve their distances, and recover them gradually when lost; that they gather their horses a little before arriving at each corner, and execute a turn to the right or to the left, according as they are marching to the right hand, or to the left hand. The movements of each should be independent of those of the one who precedes him, and should alone control his horse. 191. A horse is said to be straight, when his shoulders and haunches are upon the same line. If in marching to the right the horse carries his shoulders to the right, it is necessary to open a little the left rein, and to hold the right leg near. If he carries his haunches to the right, close the right leg and feel lightly the left rein. If he casts himself towards the interior of the riding-house, place him on the track by opening the outer rein and closing the inner leg. 192. The instructor will cause the men to pass frequently from the walk to the trot, and from the trot to the walk. The changes in the gait will be effected gradually. 193. Changes of direction in the breadth of the ridinghouse will be executed so as neither to stop nor check the rear of either column; for this purpose the change will be commenced soon after the heads of columns have entered upon the long sides of the riding-house. 194. (PLATE 20, Fig. 3.) Changes of direction in the length of the riding-house will be executed upon the same principles as those in the breadth, except that the command File right or left, will be given by the instructor as the heads of columns are entering upon the short sides, and the command MARCH, when the conductors are within 3 yards of the middle of their sides, so that the columns will pass near each other. 160 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. CHANGE OF DIRECTION OBLIQUELY BY CANNONEER. 195. (PLATE 21, Fig. 1.) A change of direction in the length of the riding-house is commenced, and as soon as all the cannoneers have turned, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers. 2. HALT. The men halt at their proper distances; the instructor then causes them to oblique to the right, (or left,) as prescribed in No. 165; rectifies their positions, if necessary, and commands: 1. Cannoneers. 2. MARCH. When all move directly to their front, retaining their direction and relative positions. When they arrive near the track, the instructor commands: FORWARD. At this command, each cannoneer executes an oblique to the left, (or right,) so as to follow the track, and moves forward. To execute these movements without halting, the instructor, as soon as the two ranks are in column in the length of the ridinghouse, commands: 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. At the first command, gather the horse. At the command MARCH, each cannoneer executes the oblique, and keeps directly to his front. At the command FORWARD, given when the cannoneers are near the track, they execute an oblique so as to move in the original direction. 196. In all the preceding changes of direction, the instructor is governed as to time, in giving his commands, by the most advanced conductor, and will then rectify the pace of the other. TO MARCH IN A CIRCLE. 197. When the conductors have passed over about a third of the long sides, the instructor commands: 1. In circle, to the right (or to the left.) 2. MARCOI. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 161 (PLATE 21, Fig. 2.) At the first command, gather the horse. At the command MARCH, the conductors, followed by the cannoneers, describe circles between the two tracks. Each horse is kept on the circle with the inner rein, supported at the same time by the leg on that side, the haunches, when necessary, being kept in by the outer leg. TO CHANGE HAND ON THE CIRCLE. 198. The instructor commands: 1. By file, right (or left.) 2. AARCH. 3. FORWARD. (PLATE 21, Fig. 3.) At the command MARCH, the conductors turn to the right, and, at the command FORWARD, pass through the centre of the circle towards the opposite point of the circumference. When they arrive near it, the instructor commands: 1. By file, left (or right.) 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. At the first command, the conductors turn to the left, and at the command FORWARD, resume their movement in circle. They are followed successively in these movements by the cannoneers. The exercise on the circle and changes of hand are executed at a trot, according to the same principles. The instructor will see that the men maintain themselves in the direction of their horses, and sit squarely. When the instructor wishes to resume the exercise on a right line, he takes care that the conductors are at opposite points of the circumference; and when they arrive on the track of the long sides, he commands FORWARD. At this command, the conductors, followed by the cannoneers, re-enter upon the track. 199. (PLATE 21, Fig. 4.) To re-unite the cannoneers, the instructor causes them to close to a distance of 2 feet, then orders a change of direction in the breadth of the riding-house at the moment the conductors are opposite to each other, the even numbers marching towards the entrance. When they arrive near the middle of the riding-house, the instructor commands: File left and right-MARC --- FORWARD. The conductor of the front rank turns to the left, that of the rear rank to the right, followed by the cannoneers, who approach within 1 foot of each other. II o 2 162 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 200. When the column reaches the stable yard, or parade, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, left into line. 2. MARCH. (PLATE 21, Fig. 5.) At the command MARCH, each of the two leading cannoneers turns to the left, moves forward 5 yards, and halts. The other cannoneers execute the same movement in succession, and take their places, each in his own rank, as prescribed in No. 187. They do not execute the turn until nearly opposite their places. TO DISMOUNT IN TWO RANKS. 201. (PLATE 19, Fig. 3.) At the command PREPARE TO DISMOUNT, NOS. 2 and 6, and the conductor on the left of the front rank, move 2 yards to the front; Nos. 1, and 5, and the conductor on the left of the rear rank, move 2 yards to the rear; the cannoneers of each rank keeping opposite their intervals, and dressing by the right. They then complete the dismount as in No. 169. As soon as they are dismounted, the instructor commands: Form RANKS. At this command, Nos. 2, 3, 6, and 7, elevate the right hand, so as to hold their horses firmly, and the conductors form on them; the other numbers advance and take their proper places in the intervals, and the rear rank then closes to 2 feet. The cannoneers file off as prescribed in No. 1,0. Each man of the rear rank follows, and conforms his movements to those of his front rank man. EXERCISE WITH THE STIRRUPS. 202. The stirrups should be of such length that when the cannoneer rises in them there should be a space of not over 4 or 5 inches between his crotch and the saddle. The stirrup should support only the weight of the leg; the foot should be inserted one-third of its length, the heel should be no higher than the toe, and in such position that the spur will not touch the horse in the movements. Plate 19. I.-. I1 ~~-,~ ~ ------------------- ---— ~ ~~a e P ~ —------------- --------------------- - - -- 4 - i- - ------- - -- - -------------- 10 yds. Aa —, ~ i~~ —— ~t4 Cob M -------------—......-. ------- --—. -------------------- - ----- 4 I -- F- -~ a n - - - - - - - - -' - - - - ------. C.. - —' — --- III ^ I,~ _ ______1 __.Plate 20.:..- - -- - -z - - -a - - ---— l --- --------- -------- ----- -- - --- -- ------ - ---- - — _ — - -- - -- - ------. r m I1 ~A I I ~' I I I il i ii I \ -- - - - - - - - - - - -- - -- - - - ----- wa-s czZ> Ca- -- cz E 10 y 100 yds. ^-$ D ^ ^ ^~~~~~~ ^ 1. ^~~~ I ^ ^ I ^ ^'~~~~~~ ^~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~c i;^~n J<9^ J/^J.s Pl1te 2L,, \ j, _ "_ _.' -.. - -------------------------------------''c c- i - " A -------------------------- --- ^ ^ ^'h' I %: 4 87-! ----- -------------------------------' - - - - - -.-......................-]., 6 0 y'~...........................-.................................~~66 SCHOOL OF THE PTECE. 163 TO TURN TO THE RIGHT OR TO THE LEFT BY CANNONEER, IN MARCHING. 203. (PLATE 20, Fig. 1.) The instructor causes the movement to be executed as prescribed in No. 180. As the cannoneers are marching in two columns, the command MARCH will be given when the leading conductors arrive opposite to the last man but one of the other column. At the command FORWARD, the cannoneers move straight forward, and pass through the intervals of the opposite column, keeping their legs near to prevent the horses slackening the gait. The instructor should attach less importance to the uniformity of their movements than to the manner in which each cannoneer manages his horse. 204. (PLATE 20, Fig. 2.) The reverse by cannoneer, in line and column, are executed as prescribed in No. 181 and No. 182, the instructor requiring more regularity as the exercise proceeds, and steadiness in passing through the intervals in line. TO PASS FROM THE HEAD TO THE REAR OF THE COLUMN. 205. To make the cannoneers masters of their horses, and to force them to use both reins and legs, the men will be required to pass in succession from the head to the rear of the column. Each becoming in his turn conductor, will regulate himself accordingly. The movement is executed in each column at the command Leading cannoneer to rear of column. The leading cannoneer leaving the head of the column by a right or left reverse, as indicated by the instructor, moves parallel to it, and again enters it at the rear by another reverse. lie leaves the column so as not to retard those behind him, and on re-entering it, closes to 4 feet from the rear horse. FROM A HALT TO MOVE AT A TROT. 206. The cannoneers being in column, on the long sides, the instructor commands: 1. Column forward-trot. 2. MARCH. 1G4 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. At the command trot, gather the horse. At the command MARCH, lower the wrists and close the legs progressively until the horse obeys. To halt, the instructor, when the columns are on the long sides, commands: 1. Column. 2. HALT. The instructor requires all the men to set off freely, at a trot, at the command MARCH, and to stop together at the command HALT. TO PASS FROM THE TROT TO THE TROT OUT, AND TO RESUME THE TROT. 207. The cannoneers, moving at a trot, on the long sides, the instructor commands: TROT OUT. At this command the wrists are lowered, and the legs closed progressively until the horse obeys. When the proper gait is assumed, the instructor will see that the men keep their horses up to it. Particular attention will be paid to the position of the cannoneers; they must hold the body erect and easy, the legs falling naturally, and hold the reins with a light hand. This will enable them to conform readily to the motions of the horse. The lengthened gait will only be maintained for one or two turns towards each hand in the riding-house. If a horse overreaches, the wrists must be more or less raised, and the legs closed, to correct it. To resume the trot, the instructor commands: SLOW-TROT. At this command, elevate the wrists by degrees until the horse obeys, closing the legs to prevent his taking the walk. TO PASS FROM THE TROT TO THE GALLOP. 208. When the cannoneers have acquired some suppleness and confidence at the trot, and trot out, they take a few turns at SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 165 the gallop. The mechanism of the gait is not at first explained, but each man accommodates himself to the motions of his horse without losing his seat. The rear rank, when on one of the short sides, is formed in line as prescribed in No. 180, and halted at 6 yards from the track; the front rank continues to march, taking distances of 3 yards between the horses, pass to the trot, and the cannoneers successively commence the gallop at the indication of the instructor as follows: On approaching the corner, trot out, feel slightly the left rein so as to keep back the left shoulder, and leave the right one free. At the moment of passing the corner, close the legs equally, but not suddenly; when the horse gallops, hold a light rein, and the legs closed sufficiently to keep him at the gait. After one or two turns, pass from the gallop to the trot, and walk; change hands in the breadth of the riding-house, and gallop to the left hand. The front rank is then formed in line on the other short side, and the rear rank carried through the same exercise. TO PASSAGE TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 209. The two columns marching at a walk, upon the long sides, the instructor causes them to execute the turn by cannoneer, as prescribed in No. 180, and halts them head to the wall, when they arrive near the opposite side. He then commands: 1. Right pass. 2. MARCH. 3. Cannoneers. 4. HALT. At the command MARCH, open the right rein to incline the horse to the right, closing at the same time the left leg, that the haunches may follow without leaning the body to the left; make use of the left rein and right leg to support the horse and moderate his movements. At the command HALT, given after a few steps have been taken, gradually cease the effect of the right rein and left leg, iG6 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. employing the opposite rein and leg; straighten the horse, and replace the wrists and legs by degrees. To passage to the left and to halt, employ the same means. These movements are at first executed by the men separately, and then together. The cannoneer should hold his horse obliquely to the track to render his movement more easy; the horse having obeyed, the effect is kept up by gentle means, and the motions and positions of the horse are regulated upon the principles laid down. 210. The passage to the right or left in column is effected on the same principles. For this purpose a change of direction in the length of the riding-house is commenced, and when the columns are parallel to and opposite each other, they are halted and the passage ordered, so as to separate them until each is again on the track, when they march forward, and the movement is repeated, which causes each horse to passage in a direction opposite to the first one. 211. During the last days of instruction with the stirrups, the instructor, in order to prepare the cannoneers for the use of the curb bridle, will cause them, from time to time, to cross reins in the left hand, so that they will conduct the horses with this hand alone. He will see that each man sits squarely on his horse during such exercise. THE CURB BRIDLE. 212. The horses are taken saddled, and in both curb and snaffle. In the first lesson they conduct the horse to the ridinghouse with the snaffle, which is held in the right hand; the reins of the curb being in the left. POSITION OF THE BRIDLE HAND. 213. The reins, with their slide, in the left hand; the little finger between the reins, the other fingers well closed; the thumb upon the second joint of the first finger; the elbow slightly detached from the body, the hand 4 inches above the pommel of the SCHCOL OF THE PIECE. 167 saddle, the fingers 6 inches from, and turned towards the body; the little finger a little nearer the body than the upper part of the wrist; the right hand at the side. To adjust the reins, the cannoneer seizes them with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, at the button or centre, partly opens the left hand so as to let them slide through it, elevates the reins until they bear equally, closes the left hand upon them, and lets fall the end of the reins and the right hand. To take the snaffle in the right hand, the instructor commands, snaffle in right hand; the cannoneer grasps the snaffle with the right hand, nails downward, holds the reins of the snaffle over those of the curb, and lowers the left hand so as not to bear upon the bit. In using alternately the curb and snaffle, the bars of the horse's mouth are relieved. Both should never be used at the same time. The cannoneers are required to take the snaffle in the right hand during the first exercises with the curb bridle, in order to keep up his right side, which is apt to remain in rear. At the command drop snaffle, the left hand is replaced, and the reins of the snaffle allowed to fall so that they will be under those of the curb, the right hand at the side. MOVEMENTS OF THE BRIDLE HAND. 214. By raising the hand slightly, and drawing it towards the body, the horse is gathered; by raising it still more, the gait is made slower; by increasing the effect of the hand, the horse is stopped; if increased still more, the horse is moved backwards. By lowering the hand, the horse is permitted to move forward; by carrying it forward, and to the right, the horse is turned to the right; by carrying it forward, and to the left, he is turned to the left. As soon as the horse obeys, the hand should be replaced. In all movements of the hand, the arm should act freely and without constraint to the body; and as the effect of the curb is more powerful than that of the snaffle, it should be used progressively, particularly in stopping and reining back. 168 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 215. To apply the foregoing principles, the instructor should first take the cannoneers through the EXERCISES AT A HALT, (Nos. 153 to 169,) and then through the MARCHINGS, (No. 174, etc.) He will not require the different movements to be executed simultaneously, but observe the manner in which each man employs his bridle hand. When sufficiently advanced in the different movements with the curb, he will cause them to march upon the track, first at a walk, then at a trot. The habitual fault with riders being to carry the left hand forward, and to throw back the right shoulder, the instructor is particular in requiring them to keep that hand above the pommel of the saddle, without deranging the position of the body. 216. To take both reins in the bridle hand, the instructor commands: SNAFFLE IN LEFT HAND. The cannoneer then passes the reins of the snaffle between the forefinger and thumb of the left hand, nails under, and draws in the hand towards the body until the reins of the curb bridle cease to act upon the bit. To drop the snaffle: the instructor commands: DROP SNAFFLE. The cannoneer lets go the snaffle without inclining the body, retakes the position of the bridle hand, and adjusts the reins. The snaffle is not taken in the left hand until the men have acquired the habit of conducting their horses with the curb bridle. To passage to the right with the curb bridle, or with both reins in the left hand, bear the shoulders of the horse to the right by inclining the hand forward and to the right; close the left leg, that the haunches may follow; keep the right leg near, to sustain the horse. In order to cease the passage, straighten the horse; hold the right leg near, and replace the hand and leg by degrees. The passage to the left is executed according to the same principles. PRINCIPLES OF THE GALLOP. 217. A horse gallops on the right foot when the right fore SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 169 and hind legs move in advance of those of the left; he gallops on the left foot when the left fore and hind legs are in advance. Hie gallops true when he gallops on the right foot in exercising or turning to the right, or on the left foot in exercising or turning to the left, and gallopsfalse, if in exercising or turning to the right he gallops on the left foot, or conversely. A horse is disunited when he gallops with the near fore leg followed by the off hind leg, or the off fore leg followed by the near hind leg. When the horse gallops on the left foot, the rider experiences a sensible movement in his position from left to right. When he gallops on the right foot, the movement of the rider is from right to left. When the horse is disunited, the rider experiences in his position irregular movements; the centre of gravity of the horse is deranged, and his strength impaired. EXERCISE AT A GALLOP. 218. The cannoneers of the rear rank being formed, as prescribed in No. 208, the instructor causes those of the front rank to take distance of 3 yards, and when they are marching at a trot, and to the right hand, on one of the long sides, he commands: 1. Gallop. 2. MARCH. At the command Gallop, gather the horse, keep him perfectly straight, and at the command MARCH, carry the hand slightly forward, and to the left, to enable the right shoulder to move in advance of the left, and close the legs behind the girth, in order to urge the horse forward, causing him to feel lightly the effect of the left leg. The horse having obeyed, hold a light hand, and the legs near, to keep him at his gait. The men must conduct their horses steadily and quietly, and keep a light hand, that the gallop may be free and regular. At first they will take the reins of the snaffle in the right hand, to calm their horses; afterwards they will gallop with the curb bridle alone. P 170 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. To keep the horse true, the rider should accommodate himself to all his motions, particularly in passing the corners. When the horse gallops false, or is disunited, the cannoneer is ordered to take the trot and pass to the rear of the column, taking care not to interfere with those who follow. When he arrives at the rear, he resumes the gallop, and the instructor explains again the manner of keeping the horse true. Only one or two turns will be made at a time at the gallop to each hand, and the cannoneers pass to the trot in order to change hand. When the horses become quiet and readily managed, the distance between them is reduced gradually to 4 feet. The rear rank is carried through the same exercises, and then both ranks at the same time. 219. When the cannoneers have been sufficiently exercised at the gallop on straight lines, the instructor causes them to take a few turns on the circle, following the principles already prescribed for exercises in the circle. The exercise will commence on very large circles, which will be progressively diminished as the cannoneers acquire skill in the management of their horses. 220. During the last few days of instruction in the foregoing exercises, the men will repeat the movements, wearing their sabres sheathed, in order that both they and the horses may become accustomed to them. The first movements with the sabre worn, will be at a slow gait, which will not be increased until the horses become perfectly calm. MANUAL OF THE SABRE. 221. The cannoneers marching by flank as in No. 190, the instructor halts the front rank, and when the rear rank is disengaged, forms it to the left in line as directed in No. 200, after which the front rank is formed on its left in the same manner. The instructor then commands: Draw-SABRE. 2 motions. At the command Draw, incline slightly the head to the left; SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 171 carry the right hand above the reins, engage the wrist in the sword knot, seize the gripe; draw the blade 6 inches from the scabbard, and turn the head to the front. At the command SABRE, draw quickly the sabre, raising the arm to its full length; hold the sabre in this position an instant, then carry it to the right shoulder, the back of the blade supported against the hollow of the shoulder, the wrist upon the top of the thigh, the little finger outside the gripe. Present-SABRE. 222. At the command SABRE, carry the sabre forward, the thumb opposite to and 6 inches from the neck; the blade perpendicular; the edge to the left; the thumb along the side of the gripe; the little finger joined to the others. Carry-SABRE. 223. At the command SABRE, carry the back of the blade against the hollow of the shoulder, the wrist upon the upper part of the thigh, the little finger outside the gripe. Inspection of SABRE. 2 pauses; 3 motions. 224. At the command SABRE, present the sabre. Two. Turn the wrist inwards, exhibit the other side of the blade, and turn the wrist back. THREE. Carry the sabre to the shoulder. Return-SABRE. 2 motions. 225. At the command Return, present the sabre. At the command SABRE, carry the wrist opposite to and 6 inches from the left shoulder; lower the blade along the left arm, the point to the rear; incline the head slightly to the left, and fix the eyes.upon the mouth of the scabbard; return the blade, disengage the wrist from the sword knot, turn the head to the front, and adjust the reins. 226. The cannoneers will be required to draw, and return sabre whilst marching at a walk in column, the instructor taking care that neither the seat, nor the position of the bridle hand is 172 SCHOOL 0O THE PIECE. deranged, that the right shoulder is not thrown back when the sabre is drawn, and that the horse is kept steadily at his gait. As they become more skilful, the sabre is drawn first at a trot, then at the gallop. In returning the sabre at a walk, the back of the blade rests against the left arm, until its point has entered the scabbard. The turns to the right and left with the sabre drawn, are executed at a trot and a gallop; the reverses, at a trot only. SABRE EXERCISE. 227. The cannoneers marching at a walk in two columns, the instructor causes one of them to halt until the other closes up. He then causes the cannoneers to take the distance of 2 yards from each other, and when they are upon a long side of the riding-house, commands: 1. By the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. He causes them then to execute the sabre exercise, as taught on foot. For the exercise at a halt, the instructor employs only the time necessary to make the cannoneers comprehend the details. They then execute progressively, at the different gaits, the exercise of the sabre, taking care to preserve between each other the distance of 2 yards. TO LEAP THE DITCH AND THE BAR. 228. For this exercise the width of the ditch should be from 3 to 5 feet, and the height of the bar from 1 to 3 feet. The width and height of each should at first be the minimum; they are increased as the men and horses become more habituated to leaping. The instructor forms the cannoneers in one rank, 30 yards in rear of the obstacle. At the warning of the instructor, each man moves off at a walk, directs his march towards the obstacle, and at a third of the way commences the trot. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 173 TO LEAP THE DITCH. 229. On arriving near the ditch, give the hand and close the legs, to force the horse to make the leap. The moment he reaches the ground, raise slightly the hand in order to sustain him. TO LEAP THE BAR. 230. On arriving near the bar, rein up the horse slightly, and close the legs. At the moment of making the leap, give the hand, and elevate it slightly as soon as he reaches the ground on the other side. The cannoneer, in leaping, should cling to the horse with the thighs and calves of the legs, taking care to lean a little forward as' the horse is in the act of springing, and to seat himself well, by leaning to the rear at the moment the horse reaches the ground. Each man, after having made the leap, continues to move at the trot, and takes his place in the rank which is formed 30 yards beyond the obstacle, taking care to pass to the walk just before halting. During the first days of this exercise, the cannoneers leap without arms, the instructor causing them to take the snaffle in the right hand. Afterwards they repeat the same exercise with arms, and finally with the sabre drawn. Horses should not be made to leap more than two or three times in any one day. P 2 174 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. ARTICLE SIXTH. THE DETACHMENT. Horse Artillery. 231. The detachment is formed in two ranks, with closed intervals; the distance between the ranks 2 feet, measuring from head to croup. It is told off as in mounted artillery, excepting that two additional men, required as horse holders, and numbered 9 and 10, are posted, No. 9 in the centre of the rear, No. 10 in the centre of the front rank. The gunner, when not himself the instructor, takes his place on the right of the front rank. In battery maneuvres, No. 8 is posted with the caisson, of which he is chief, and manceuvres with it. He is replaced in the detachment by the gunner. TO MOUNT AND DISMOUNT IN TWO RANKS. 232. To mount. The instructor commands: 1. Prepare to mount. 2. MOUNT. (PLATE 22.) At the command Prepare to mount, the gunner, No. 4, and No. 6, move 2 yards to the front, Nos. 3 and 5, 2 yards to the rear, covering their intervals; the mounting is then completed. The instructor then commands: Form-RANKS. At this command, the gunner and Nos. 4 and 6 stand fast, and the others form on them without jostling or precipitation, the rear rank closing up to 2 feet. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 175 233. To dismount. The instructor commands: 1. Prepare to dismount. 2. DISMOUNT. (PLATE 22.) At the first command, the gunner and Nos. 4 and 6 move forward, and Nos. 3 and 5 rein back 2 yards, and the dismount is completed. The instructor then commands FormRANKS, which is executed by the cannoneers leading their horses into the proper intervals, and closing up the ranks, as in the directions for mounting. TO FORM IN ONE RANK. 234. The instructor commands: 1. Left into single rank. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. 4. Right-DREss. 5. FRONT. At the command MARCH, the gunner advances 5 yards, and halts. No. 8 turns short to the left, and moves forward; he is followed by the other even numbers, who execute successively the same movement. At the command HALT, given in time to enable him to take his proper distance, No. 8 turns short to the right, and moves forward, until on a line with the gunner. The other even numbers turn in time to place themselves in rank successively, on the right of the cannoneer, who precedes him. At the command Right-DREss, the odd numbers move to their front, and align themselves on the gunner. At the command FRONT, all cast their eyes to the front. ALIGNMENTS. 235. General principles. The cannoneers in dressing must square their shoulders by those of the man next to them on the side towards the guide, and cast their eyes in that direction, until they see the breast of the second man from them; feeling lightly the boot of the man on that side, and keeping their horses straight on the line. When there are two ranks, the rear rank men cover their front rank men accurately, preserving the distance of 2 feet from head to croup. 176 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 236. Successive alignment of files-to the front. Two or more files of the right are moved forward, and aligned by the commands Two (or-) right files forward-MARCH-IHALT-RightDRESS. The instructor then commands: 1. By file, Right-DRESS. 2. FRONT. At the first command, the files move forward successively; the cannoneers turning the head to the right, and taking the last steps slowly, so as not to pass the line. Each file moves when the preceding one arrives on the base of alignment. When the last file is aligned, the instructor commands FRONT, and all turn their heads in that direction. 237. To the rear. Two or more files of the right are made to rein back 2 yards, and align themselves opposite their places; by the commands Two (or -) right files backward —MARCH HALT —ight-DRESS. The instructor then commands: 1. By file, Bight backward-DREss. 2. FRONT. At the command DRESS, the files rein back in succession, keeping perfectly straight. The cannoneers turning their heads to the right, pass a little the files already formed, and then dress up. The cannoneers rein back slowly. When there are two ranks, the rear rank men regulate themselves on their file leaders, preserving always their proper distance. When the last file is aligned, the command FRONT is given. 238. To align the detachment. The instructor places the file of the flank on which he wishes to align it, in such position that no cannoneer will be forced to rein back, and commands: I. Right-DRESS. 2. FRONT. At the first command, all the cannoneers align themselves promptly. At the second, they cast their eyes to the front. The alignments are made to the left on the same principles. The alignment to the rear gives the means of returning to the alignment when it has been passed over, but it should be avoided as much as possible. The cannoneers should always align themselves on the breast of the second man towards the side of the alignment, and not SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 17 upon the extremity of the rank; the rear rank men being careful to cover accurately their file leaders. The men will align themselves promptly, that the horses may not be kept a long time gathered. 239. When the cannoneers are not aligned, it is generally because the horses are not straight in the ranks. In dressing to the right, if the men on the left of the detachment are in rear, it is presumed that most of the horses are turned to the left. If this is the case, the horse is placed on the alignment by carrying the hand to the right and closing the right leg. If, after squaring his horse, a cannoneer finds himself behind the line, he moves forward. If, in dressing to the right, the cannoneers on the left are in advance of the line, it is presumed that the horses are turned to the right. To rectify this, carry the hand to the left, closing the left leg; those who are still in advance will then rein back. In dressing to the left, the same faults are corrected by inverse means. 240. During the alignments the instructor places himself in front of the cannoneers, to see that they move steadily, and do not turn the head too much; that they do not open the knee in order to feel the boot; that they prevent their horses from crowding those already formed; that they take the last steps slowly; align themselves without losing time, and give the hand at once. The alignments will be occasionally interrupted by marches, in order to calm the horses. TO FORM IN TWO RANKS. 241. The detachment being formed in one rank, the instructor commands: 1. Right into two ranks. 2. MARCH. 3. Bight-DRESS. 4. FRONT. At the command MARCH, the gunner advances 5 yards, and halts. No. 2 turns to the right, moves along the front of the odd numbers, and turns short to the left in time to halt square in 12 178 SCHOOL OF TIE PIECE. front of No. 1. The other even numbers follow his movements, and form on his left. As soon as the front rank is in position, the rear rank takes the distance of two feet, and at the third and fourth command the detachment is aligned to the right. When formed in two ranks, the detachment will be taken through the foregoing movements together. TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANKS. 242. To open the ranks. The instructor commands: 1. To the rear, open order. 2. MARCH. 3. Right-DREss. 4. FRONT. At the command MARCH, the front rank remains immovable; the rear rank reins back 6 yards, each cannoneer preserving the direction of his file leader. At the third command, the rear rank is aligned to the right. 243. To close the ranks. The instructor commands: 1. Close order. 2. MARCH. 3. Right-DRESS. 4. FRONT. At the command MARCH, the rear rank closes to the distance of 2 feet from the front, each cannoneer accurately covering his file leader. At the third command, the detachment is aligned to the right. TO REIN BACK THE DETACHMENT. 244. The detachment being at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Detachment, backwards. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide-rJcIGT. At the command MARCH, all the cannoneers rein back at once, following the principles already prescribed for the movement, and regulating themselves by the guide. After they have reined back some steps, the instructor commands: 1. Detachment — HALT. 2. Right (or left) DRESS. 3. FRONT. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 179 TO MARCH THE DETACHMENT BY FILE. 245. To the front. (PLATE 22.) The detachment being at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Double files from the right. 2. MARCH. At the first command, the cannoneers of the right file gather their horses, as do the others, in succession, as soon as the file on their right is in motion. At the command MARCH, the right file moves straight to the front. Each of the other files move as soon as the rear rank man of the file on its right is on a line with its front rank man These two cannoneers advance 5 yards abreast, oblique to the right; march in the new direction until nearly opposite their places, when they oblique to the left, so as to enter the column; the rear rank man then quickens his pace, and takes his position at the side of his proper front rank man. To break the detachment by the left, the movement is executed according to the same principles, at the commands: 1. Double files from the left. 2. MARCH. 246. To the right (or left.) The instructor commands: 1. By the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. (PLATE 19, Fig. 4.) At the first command, gather the horses. At the command MARCH, the cannoneer on the right (or left) of each rank executes a turn to the right, (or left,) and moves forward, the one in the rear rank approaching his front rank man. This movement is executed by all the other cannoneers in succession. When the gunner is in the ranks, he constitutes a file; all the movements are made as if he were an even number, and the file complete. 247. To form the detachment by file when it is in march, the same commands are given as if it were at a halt. At the command MARCH, all the cannoneers except the file which commences the movement halt, if the detachment is at a walk; or walk, if it is at a trot; and the movement is executed as already directed, in resuming the original gait. 180 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. DIRECT MARCH IN FILE. 248. The even numbers are guides; they preserve the distance of 2 feet from head to croup, move steadily, and regain the distances gradually when lost. The odd numbers dress on their guides, keeping up lightly the touch of the boot. CHANGE OF DIRECTION IN FILE. 249. The column marching, the instructor commands: 1. By file, left (or right.) 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. At the command MARCH, the left (or right) cannoneer at the head of the column executes the turn; the cannoneer abreast of him conforms to the movement, increasing his gait and keeping up the touch of the boot. At the command FORWARD, both move to the front at the original gait. The other cannoneers execute the same movement on the same ground. TO HALT AND TO MOVE OFF. 250. To halt the column, the instructor commands: Column-HALT. To resume the march, he commands: 1. Column, forward. 2. MARCH. OBLIQUE IN FILE. 251. The column marching, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, left (or right) oblique. 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, each cannoneer obliques to the left; the leading cannoneer of the left file is the guide of the column, and moves straight forward in the new direction; the other cannoneers of that file move in the same direction, and on a line with him. The cannoneers of the right file dress on their guides, each placing his left knee behind the right knee of his guide, keeping the head of his horse on a line with the shoulders of the horse on his left, and marches in this way during the oblique. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 181 To return to the primitive direction, the instructor commands: FORWARD. The oblique to the right is executed on the same principles. 252. In the oblique march, the guide is always on the side towards which the oblique is made; and, at the command FOR WARD, returns to the original side. The change of guides will be made without any special commands. If the guide of any rank ceases to be on the line of the guide of the column, he quickens or shortens the pace without changing direction, in order to recover his place. If the other cannoneers become disunited, they rejoin the guide of their rank, taking care not to lose their alignment, nor to retard those who march behind them. TO BREAK INTO SINGLE FILE. 253. The column marching in double file, the instructor commands: 1. In single file. 2. MARCH. At the command single file, all the cannoneers, except the even number at the head of the column, prepare to halt. At the command MARCH, they halt. As soon as the odd number of the first rank is passed by the horse of the even number, he enters the column by two successive oblique movements. Each rank of two executes in succession the same movement, the even numbers breaking as soon as the odd number of the rank in front commences obliquing to enter the column. The gait is regulated so as to keep the distances. When the column is at a trot or gallop, it is broken into single files according to the same principles and by the same commands; the even number of the leading rank continues the gait; the others coming to a walk in case the column is at a trot, or a trot in case it is at a gallop, as soon as the command MARCH is given, and resuming the original gait to enter the column. 254. The column by single file may be formed from the detachment when in line, by the commands: 1. Single file from the right. 2. MARCH. Q 182 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. At the command MARCH, the file indicated moves to the front. When the croup of the rear rank horse is opposite the head of the leading horse of the next file, that file puts itself in motion, advances 5 yards, obliques to the right, and again to the left, so as to enter the column. Each file takes up the movement in succession, governing itself by that of the file on its right. The column is formed' in single file from the left on the same principles. The movement in single file will never be used in the artillery except when unavoidable. TO FORM IN DOUBLE FILES. 255. The column being in single file, marching, or at a walk, the instructor commands: 1. Double files. 2. MARCH. At the first command, all gather their horses. At the command MARCH, the odd numbers oblique to the right, if the right is in front; to the left, if the left is in front; and, by another oblique, place themselves at the sides of their even numbers, quickening the gait for the purpose if the column is in march. All close up to 2 feet from head to croup. TO FORM THE DETACHMENT IN LINE. 256. To the front. The detachment marching in double files, right in front, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, into line. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide-RIGHT. At the first command, all gather their horses; the odd numbers slacken their gait until they are on a line with the next even number behind them. At the command MARCH, the guide of the column continues to advance; the other cannoneers oblique to the left, quickening their gait, until opposite their places in line; then they oblique to the right, and form in succession in line, each in his proper SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 183 rank. The instructor gives the command for the guide imme. diately after the command MARCH. When the detachment is at a halt, the leading guide, at the first command, moves forward 5 yards and halts, and the movement is executed as already directed, except that instead of the command for the guide, the instructor commands: 3. Right-DRESS. 4. FRONT. 257. To the right. The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, on right into line. 2. MARCH. 3. Right-DREss. 4. FRONT. At the first command, the odd numbers slacken the gait until they are on a line with the next even number behind them. At the command MARCH, the guide of the column turns to the right, advances 5 yards, and halts; the other cannoneers continue to advance, turn in succession to the right, and form in line; each in his proper rank. 258. To the left. The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, to the left into line. 2. MARCH. 3. Right-DRiEss. 4. FRONT. At the first command, gather the horses. At the command MARCH, each of the two leading cannoneers turns to the left, moves forward 5 yards, and halts. The other cannoneers execute the same movement in succession, when they are nearly opposite their places, and take their proper positions in line; each in his own rank. In forming line to the right, and to the left, the command Right-DRESS is given when the leading cannoneer halts. The command FRONT is given when the last file is aligned. 259. When the column is moving left in front, the line is formed to the front, left, and right, on the same principles. DIRECT MARCH IN LINE. 260. It is important in the direct march to keep the horses straight in the ranks. To keep themselves aligned, the cannoneers should feel lightly the boot of the man on the side of the 184 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. guide, march at an equal gait, and preserve the head direct. They should yield to all pressure coming from the side of the guide, and resist that coming from the opposite side. The guide should march at a free and steady gait, and change it with steadiness, in order to avoid irregularity in the ranks. If the cannoneers are in front, or in rear of the alignment, too near or too far from the man on the side of the guide, they move from or approach him gradually, and in gaining ground to the front. When there is too much pressure on the guide, he extends his arm to the front, and the cannoneers carry the bridle hand to the opposite side, in order to relieve him. The cannoneer of the flank opposite the guide is not required to preserve the head direct; he aligns himself on the general front of the detachment, and on the guide, which is commanded alternately, to the right and left. When halted, the alignment is ordered towards the side of the guide. 261. The detachment being in line, the instructor commands: 1. To the left, (or right,) open files. 2 MARCH. 3. Right (or left) DRESS. 4. FRONT. At the command MARCH, all the cannoneers, except the right file, passage to the left; the next cannoneer straightens his horse, and halts as soon as he has gained an interval of I yard. Each of the other cannoneers executes the same movement, regulating the interval by the man on his right. The cannoneers of the rear rank follow their file leaders, and keep their proper intervals. The instructor orders the alignment as soon as the second man from the right has attained his interval. When it is completed, the instructor indicates to the guide of the right, or of the left, a fixed point, in a direction perpendicular to the front of the detachment; he instructs him to take an intermediate point; never to lose sight of these two; and to select a more distant point as he approaches the one nearest to him. To give a point of direction, the instructor places himself SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 185 exactly behind the right file, or the left file, and indicates to the cannoneer of the front rank an object on the ground, which is immovable, and can be distinctly seen; such as a steeple, a tree, or a house; the cannoneer of the rear rank keeps himself always in file, and at his proper distance. 262. To march the detachment forward, the instructor commands: 1. Detachment, forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide-RIGHT, (or LEFT.) At the command MARCH, which is immediately followed by that for the guide, all the cannoneers move straight forward, a.t the same gait with the men on the side of the guide, towards whom, as they are not boot to boot, they should give a glance from time to time. During the march, the instructor is sometimes at the side of the guide, to assure himself that the men march on the same line, and sometimes behind the guide, to observe that he follows the direction indicated. To halt the detachment, he commands: 1. Detachment-HALT. 2. Right (or left) DRESS. 3. FRONT. 263. The cannoneers having been sufficiently exercised in marching with open files, the instructor halts the detachment, and commands: 1. To the right, (or left,) close files. 2. MARCH. 3. Right (or left) DRESS. 4. FRONT. At the command MARCH, all the cannoneers, except the right file, passage to the right, and resume their places, boot to boot. 264. After the files are closed, the detachment is put in motion by the commands prescribed in No. 262. The cannoneers move straight forward; feeling lightly the boot towards the side of the guide. 265. When the men begin to manage their horses properly at the walk, they are required to open and close files whilst marching at the same gait, the instructor taking care not to repeat these movements too often, but to make them march some time after Q 2 186 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. having opened the files before closing them, and after having closed the files before opening them. For this purpose he commands: 1. To the left, (or right,) open files. 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, all the cannoneers, except the right file, oblique to the left, quickening the gait so as to preserve their alignment. When they are 1 yard from the man on the right, they straighten their horses, and move forward. To close files, the instructor commands: 1. To the right, (or left,) close files. 2. MARCH. Each cannoneer, except the guide, obliques to the right until closed, preserves the alignment, and resumes the march to the front, without pressing on the man towards the side of the guide. The files are always opened from and closed towards the direction of the guide. 266. These movements having been executed to the right, and to the left, in marching at the walk, are repeated at the trot, in passing frequently from the walk to the trot, and from the trot to the walk. The detachment is then exercised in commencing the trot from a halt, and in halting whilst marching at this gait. 267. To exercise the cannoneers in the direct march at the gallop, the same progression is followed as at the walk and trot, except that the ranks are neither opened nor closed. The rear rank preserves exactly its distance. When exercising at a gallop, the detachment should habitually pass to the trot and the walk before being halted; but when the cannoneers are masters of their horses, it may be halted sometimes without changing the gait. WHEELING. 268. General principles. In executing a wheel whilst the detachment is in march, the conductor of the marching flank should increase his gait, and describe his arc so as to cause the files neither to open nor close. The pivot describes an arc of a circle of 2 yards radius in slackening the gait. The cannoneers from the centre to the marching flank increase, and those from the SCHOOL OF TEE PIECE. 187 centre to the pivot decrease the gait progressively, so that the centre man preserves the gait at which the detachment was marching. At the end of the wheel, all resume the original gait, and straighten their horses. The conductor of the marching flank should measure with his eye the arc of the circle he is to pass over, so that it may not be necessary for the files either to open or close. He turns his head occasionally towards the pivot; if he perceives that the cannoneers are too much crowded, or too open, he increases or diminishes gradually the extent of his circle, in gaining more ground to the front than to the side. Each cannoneer of the fiont rank should describe his circle in the ratio of the distance at which he may be from the pivot; when opened, they should approach the pivot insensibly, diminishing their circle by degrees. When too much closed, they should increase the circle gradually. At the.command FORWARD, they cease to wheel, and resume the direct march, at whatever point of the wheel they may be. The flanks which become pivots, or marching flanks, do not slacken or augment the pace until the command of execution is given. 269. The wheelings are executed at first in single rank; for this purpose the detachment is formed in one rank, and, being aligned, the instructor commands: 1. Detachment in circle, right (or left) wheel. 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, the cannoneers put themselves in motion, the pivot describing the arc of a circle of which the radius is 2 yards, at a slow gait; the marching flank moves briskly, and regulates itself by the pivot, avoiding all pressure in the ranks. 270. When the detachment has executed several wheels, to halt it, the instructor commands: 1. Detachment, HALT. 2. Left (or right) DRESS. 3. FRONT. At the command IALT, the cannoneers straighten their horses, and halt with steadiness. Before dressing the detachment, the 188 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. cannoneer on the marching flank is made to come up abreast of the pivot man, so that the others will not have to rein back in order to align themselves. 271. The detachment is then marched forward, and made to recommence the wheel whilst marching, and by the same commands. At the first command the pivot man prepares to slacken, and the marching flank to quicken the gait, so that the centre man will preserve the gait at which he was marching; the wheel is then executed as prescribed. When the instructor wishes the detachment to take the direct march instead of halting, he commands: 1. FORWARD. 2. Guide right, (or left.) At the command FORWARD, the pivot resumes the gait at which it was previously marching, the other cannoneers straighten their horses, and thy two flanks move forward at the same gait, conforming to the principles of the direct march. When the cannoneers have executed several wheels to the right, and to the left, interrupted occasionally by direct marches, and when the horses become calm, the instructor causes them to pass to the trot. After several wheels at the trot, they resume the walk. 272. When sufficiently exercised in single rank, the cannoneers are formed in two ranks, and the wheels executed in following the same gradation. The instructor commands: 1. Detachment in circle, right (or left) wheel. 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, the men of the front rank execute the movement as prescribed in No. 269, the cannoneers of the rear rank turn the head, and carry the hand towards the marching flank, so that each one may be out of the direction of his file leader by two men. For this purpose, the moment the wheel commences, each rear rank man executes a quarter turn to the left, if the wheel is to the right; to the right, if the wheel is to the left, keeping, during the wheel, in the direction of his new file leader, and remaining at the distance of 2 feet from the front SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 189 rank. The two rear rank men on the marching flank, who are without file leaders, should describe their circle without being farther outside of the front rank than is necessary, and be able to resume their places behind their file leaders easily. During the wheel they should regulate their gaits so that the rear rank, which aligns itself upon them, may be at its proper distance. 273. To stop the wheel, the instructor commands: 1. Detachment. 2. HALT. 3. Left (or right) DRESS. 4. FRONT. At the command Detachment, the rear rank men straighten their horses, and return to the direction of their file leaders. At the command HALT, all the cannoneers halt. The detachment is then marched to the front, and made to repeat the same movement. 274. When the instructor wishes the detachment to resume the direct march, he commands: 1. FORWARD. 2. Guide left (or right.) At the command FORWARD, the rear rank men replace themselves behind their file leaders, and march straight forward. When the cannoneers have acquired the skill necessary to avoid confusion in the execution of the foregoing movements, they are repeated at the trot. 275. The detachment being in line, at a halt, or in march, to place it in a position perpendicular to the original front, the instructor commands: 1. Detachment, right (or left) wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. 4. Left (or right) DRESS. 5. FRONT. Which commands are executed on the same principles as the wheel in circle, a quarter of a circle only being described, and the command HALT given when the wheel is nearly completed. 276. The detachment being in line, at a halt, or in march, to place it in a direction oblique to the original front, the instructor commands: 1. Detachment, right-half, (or left-half,) wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. 4. Left (or right) DRESS. 5. FRONT. 90 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. Which is executed as in the wheel, except that the eighth of a circle only is passed over. 277. The detachment being in line, at a halt, or in march, to place it in a position faced to the rear, the instructor commands: 1. Detachment, right (or left) reverse. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. 4. Left (or right) DRESS. 5. FRONT. Which commands are executed as prescribed in No. 275, except that a semicircle is described. 278. In all the wheels, when, instead of halting, it is desired to move forward at their completion, instead of the commands 3. HALT, etc., the commands will be: 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide right (or left.) The command FORWARD is given as soon as the detachment is in the new direction; all the cannoneers resume the march to the front, and the command for the guide follows immediately. The foregoing movements being properly executed, from a halt and at a walk, are repeated at a trot. OBLIQUE IN LINE. 279. The detachment marching in line, to cause it to gain ground towards one of its flanks without changing the front, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, the cannoneers execute an oblique to tne right, so that the head of each horse may be opposite the shoulders of the horse on his right, and that the right knee of each cannoneer may be in rear of the left knee of the man on his right. The men then move in the new direction, regulating upon the guide. When the detachment has obliqued sufficiently, the instructor commands: FORWARD. The cannoneers straighten their horses, and move forward. When in the execution of an oblique march, the guide is always on the flank of the detachment towards which the oblique is made; SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 191 and after the command FORWARD, the guide returns, without a command, to the side on which it was when the oblique was ordered. This rule is general. When the cannoneers are not closed, they increase the gait; when too much closed, or more advanced than the guide, they slacken the gait. 280. The detachment marching at a walk, to execute the oblique at a trot, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) oblique-trot. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. The guide commences the trot without precipitation. The same principle is applied when the detachment is at a trot, and the object is to oblique at a gallop. CHANGES OF GAIT. 281. When the detachment has been sufficiently instructed in the different movements at a walk, the gaits may be changed during their execution, at the command of the instructor. To pass from one gait to another, the instructor commands: 1. Trot, (trot out, or gallop.) 2. MARCH. And the cannoneers pass to the gait indicated, the instructor seeing that they conform to what is prescribed in Nos. 206 and 207. To move at the rapid gaits from a halt, in executing the foregoing movements, the instructor adds the command trot, trot out, or gallop, to the command of preparation, immediately preceding that of execution, as in No. 280, for obliquing at a trot. 282. All changes of gait must be made gradually, and care must be taken never to check a horse so suddenly as to injure his mouth, or throw him on his haunches. THE PLATOON. 283. The principles of the instruction, as laid down for the detachment, are applicable to the platoon, the word Platoon 192 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. being substituted for Detachment, wherever the latter occurs in the commands. The platoon is divided into detachments of eight men each, the horse holders being left out, and the men are told off as in No. 187. The gunner is on the right of the platoon; the chief of caisson is the front rank man of the left file. The mounting and dismounting are executed as in Nos. 188 and 201; the gunner taking his place on the right, at the command FORM RANKS. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 193 ARTICLE SEVENTH. THE DRIVER. 284. THE value of horses depends greatly upon the management of them, and the care bestowed upon them. A man, therefore, who would be likely to treat them with neglect, cruelty, or harshness, should never be intrusted with the charge of a pair. The men selected should be thoroughly instructed in Article Fifth, and, together with a sufficient number of cannoneers to provide against casualties, be carefully taught in all the duties of drivers. As opportunity occurs, the other cannoneers should be instructed, until all are familiar with at least so much of the duties as are included in the School of the Piece. Four drivers, with their horses, are united for instruction. The horses are taken in the stalls, which are supposed to be separated by swing bales, or at the pickets; the drivers are in boots and spurs, and sabre belts. When practicable, a well-instructed driver should superintend each man who is taking his first lessons in harnessing. 285. (PLATE 18.) A pair of horses, properly harnessed, should be paraded; the different parts of the harness indicated, and their uses explained'to the men individually. DRIVERS' SADDLE; COLLAR: rimn, belly, pad, straps, and billets; HAMES: branches, toggles, loops for trace tugs, links for breast straps, rings, trace tugs, trussing straps, hane straps, collar straps; TRACES: trace chains, trace loops, trace hooks, belly band, loin strap; CRITPPER; BREECHING: breech strap, hip strap, breast strap, loop for pole straps; VALISE SADDLE: hook for reins; VALISE; WHIP: stock, lash; LEG GUARD: body, under strap, leg straps, plate. 13 R 194 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. The harness, in its store-room or in the stable, is placed on its peg; the pommel of the saddle next the heel post; the breeching hangs over the cantle; the breast strap and hames over the pommel; the leg guard under the saddle of the near horse; the collars hang over the cantles; each blanket covers its own saddle; the harness bridle, properly secured, hangs on its peg, which should be short, and placed under that of the harness; the whole covered by the harness sack, properly secured. TO HARNESS. 286. The instructor causes the harness sacks to be taken off, places each man at the heel post, between his horses, and commands: HARNESS. 5 pauses; 6 motions. At the command HARNESS, each wheel driver puts on and buckles the collar of his off horse, or passes it, buckled, carefully over the horse's head, arranges and puts on the saddle blanket, then places himself on the left of the saddle. Two. He seizes the pommel with the left and the cantle with the right hand; slips it off the peg; approaches the near side of the horse, and adjusts the saddle in its proper position, taking care that the blanket does not get deranged nor creased. THREE. He passes to the front of the horse, pulls the breast strap carefully over his head; adjusts the hames to the collar, connects the lower part of the branches, and tightens the hame straps. FouR. He passes to the near side of the horse, disengages the breeching; then moving to the rear, draws it over the horse's haunches; arranges the crupper and loin strap. FIVE. He sees that the harness is properly arranged, tightens and buckles the girth, and buckles the belly band. Six. He bridles the horse, and secures the end of the check rein over the left head post, or to the picket rope. The near horse is harnessed in the same manner and by the same commands, with this exception: SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 195 Six. At this command, the driver puts his leg guard on the right leg, plate outwards; bridles the horse; looses the check rein of the off horse, and, facing towards them, seizes the reins of the near one with his right, and of the off horse with his left hand, near the bit; backs them into the gangway, facing them towards the door, and takes the position prescribed for leading to the exercise ground. In harnessing and unharnessing the lead horses, the instructions as laid down for the wheelers apply, with the modifications required by the nature of the harness. 28T. Leading to the exercise ground. The driver, with sabre, when worn, hooked up, assumes the position of STAND TO HORSE, holding at the same time the coupling rein of his off horse, thrown over the neck of his near one, in his right hand, so as to lead both. At the command LEAD OUT, all conduct their horses to the exercise ground, and form in one rank, 4 yards apart, with their horses on their right, the traces trussed up to the hames. TO COUPLE. 288. At the command COUPLE, the driver goes in front of his horses, faces towards them, passes his right hand through the reins of his near horse, and doubles the coupling rein 3- feet from the bit; with his right hand he passes the doubled part from below through the ring on the right hame of the near horse, inserts the running end of the coupling rein-which is again doubled so as to be readily uncoupled-through this loop, makes it fast by pulling with his left hand, and then resumes the position of STAND TO HORSE. When the off horse has a curb bridle, the rein of this bridle is held in the hand without being coupled. TO MOUNT. 289. The instructor mounts the drivers by the commands and means prescribed for mounting the cannoneer. The reins being adjusted, the driver seizes the whip with his right hand, and fastens it to his wrist by means of the loop; then takes hold a96 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. of the coupling rein 20 inches from the hame, closing his hand and pressing his thumb strongly against the second joint of his fore finger, nails downward, the arms falling naturally. USE OF THE COUPLING REIN AND WHIP. 290. The coupling rein and whip are, for the off horse, what the bridle reins and legs are for the near. If the off horse moves too far forward, he is gently checked by carrying the right hand with the rein nearer to his neck; if he keeps behind, make him feel the whip on his right haunch; if he throws his shoulders in, or haunches out, touch him gently with the whip on his right haunch. The driver should be careful not to use the coupling rein abruptly, especially in halting and reining back, otherwise he will throw the horse suddenly, and too much upon his haunches. 291. To gather the horses, the driver raises his right hand and' moves it towards the neck of the off horse, at the same time executing for the near horse what is prescribed in No. 160. TO MARCH. 292. The instructor commands: 1. Drivers, forward. 2. MARCH. At the first command, gather the horses. At the command MARCH, the driver starts his off horse by lowering his right hand and moving it forward, replacing it as soon as the horse obeys; at the same time he moves the near horse as prescribed for the cannoneer. 293. To halt. The instructor commands: 1. Drivers. 2. HALT. The near horse is halted as prescribed for the cannoneer; the driver at the same time halts the off horse by gradually carrying the reins towards his neck, raising the right hand so as to make the bit bear. He replaces the hand as soon as the horse obeys. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 191 TO TURN TO THE RIGHT OR TO THE LEFT. 294. The instructor commands: 1. Drivers, right wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. At the first command, the driver gathers his horses. At the second, he wheels them to the right, making the off horse describe a quadrant of a circle whose radius is 3'25 yards or 10 feet. The off horse moves at the ordinary gait, the near horse quickens his movements to correspond with those of the off horse. At the third command, he halts and holds the horses in hand. The turn to the left is executed according to the same principles at the commands Drivers, left wheel, MARCH, HALT. In this case the near horse, moving at the ordinary gait, describes the quadrant of 5 yards to the left, the off horse quickening his movements to correspond. 295. In all turns and wheels, the inner horse describes the arc of a circle whose radius is 3-25 yards; the outer horse increasing his gait, and conforming his movements to those of the inner one. TO REVERSE. 296. The instructor commands: 1. Drivers, right (or left) reverse. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. The movement is executed on the same principles as the wheel, the inner horse describing a semicircle of 10 yards, and the outer one of 12 yards, with such an increase of gait as will make his movements correspond with those of the inner horse. TO OBLIQUE. 29T. The instructor commands: 1. Drivers, right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. Which is executed according to the principles of the wheel, observing that the oblique is one-eighth of a circle, and that the R2 198 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. inner horse passes over an arc of 2 5 yards, the radius being 3-25 yards. TO REIN BACK. 298. The instructor commands: 1. Drivers, backward. 2. MARCH. 3. Drivers, HALT. The movement is executed according to the principles prescribed for halting, the driver alternately raising and lowering the wrists as the horses obey, and taking care to move both horses equally. They should at first be backed but a few paces, and the aids prescribed in No. 167 may be used if necessary. At the command HALT, slacken the reins and close the legs; when the horses obey,.replace them. TO DISMOUNT. 299. The instructor commands: 1. Prepare to dismount. 2. DISMOUNT. At the first command, the driver lets go the coupling rein, and hangs the whip from the hook of the valise saddle. He then finishes the movement as prescribed for the cannoneer, and, when it is worn, hooks up the sabre. TO FILE OFF. 300. The instructor commands: 1. By the right, (or left,) file off. 2. MARCH. At the first command, the driver uncouples by pulling the running end of the coupling rein until it is detached from the hame ring, passing to the front of the horses for the purpose. He then passes the coupling rein over the neck of the near horse, and, holding it with the reins in the right hand, assumes the position of STAND TO HORSE. At the command MARCH, the drivers file off as already directed for the cannoneer. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 199 TO UNHARNESS. 301. The horses having been returned to their stalls, or the pickets, the off horse is secured by means of the check rein. The instructor then commands: UNHARNESS. 4 pauses; 5 motions. At this command, the driver takes off his leg guard, and hangs it up; unbridles the near horse, and puts up the bridle. Two. He unbuckles and frees the crupper; slips the breeching over the rump, and places it over the cantle of the saddle, resting the middle of it on the seat. THREE. He goes to the front, draws the breast straps well forward through their links; loosens the hame straps at the top, disconnects the branches at the bottom; passes the breast strap over the horse's head; laying it, and then the hames, over the pommel of the saddle. FOUR. He loosens the belly band, and then the girth; strips off the saddle; places it properly on its peg, and covers it with the blanket. FIVE. He removes and puts up the collar, and secures the horse by his halter. The off horse is unharnessed in the same manner and by the same commands. 302. Before removing the harness from the horse, it should be wiped clean and dry, if practicable; if not, it should be put in good order at the earliest convenient moment, and covered with its sack. 303. After the drivers have learned to execute properly each motion of harnessing and unharnessing, which should be done under the eye of the instructor, or other non-commissioned officer, or a well-instructed driver, they should be made to execute the movements in two motions. Afterwards, at the simple command HARNESS, they will harness both horses of their pairs, taking care to follow the directions in the order laid down in the different numbers. 200 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 304. To harness in two motions. The instructor commands: 1. In two motions. 2. HARNESS. At the command HARNESS, they execute the first three motions of No. 286 Two. The drivers execute the last three motions of the same number. 305. To unharness in two motions. At the command: 1. In two motions. 2. UNHARNESS, the drivers execute the first two motions of No. 301, and at the command Two, they execute the remainder. MARCHING.306. Not more than eight drivers, with their horses, are united for this part. The men are in spurs and sabres. The horses are harnessed, led out, formed in line, as prescribed in No. 287, and coupled. The instructor causes the drivers to mount, and again explains the uses of the coupling rein and whip,.and the manner of gathering, moving, and halting their horses. TO BREAK INTO COLUMN TO THE FRONT. 307. The instructor commands: 1. Drivers, from the right, front into column. 2. MARCH. (PLATE 23, Fig. 1.) At the first command, the driver on the right gathers his horses; and at the command MARCH, moves directly to the front. As soon as he moves, the next driver gathers his horses; and so soon as the haunches of the first pair are on a line with the heads of his own, he moves forward 5 yards, obliques to the right, and again to the left, in time to enable him to enter the column. He then follows in the tracks of the pair that precedes him, preserving the distance of 2 yards from head to croup. Each of the other drivers executes the movement in succession, as prescribed for the second. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 201 The column is formed from the left on the same principles, the commands being, 1. Drivers, from the left, front into column. 2. MARCH. CHANGE OF DIRECTION IN COLUMN. 308. The drivers marching in column, to execute a change of direction to the right or left, the instructor commands: 1. Head of column, right (or left) wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. At the first command, the leading driver executes the wheel, and moves directly to his front at the command FORWARD. He is followed by the other drivers, who wheel in succession on the same ground. A change of direction, diagonally, is executed at the command: 1. Head of column, right (or left) half-wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. The leading driver making a half-wheel, and moving to the front. TO HALT THE COLUMN. 309. The instructor commands: 1. Column. 2. HALT. At the first command, the driver gathers his horses; at the second, he halts. To resume the march in column, the commands are: 1. Column forward.. 2MARCH. TO OBLIQUE IN COLUMN. 310. The instructor commands: 1. Drivers, right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH. Which is executed as in No. 297, except that when the drivers 202 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. have made a half-wheel, they move directly to the front, until the command FORWARD is given, when they resume the primitive direction. Whilst obliquing, the drivers may be halted by the command Drivers, HALT. To resume the march in the oblique direction, the command is given: 1. Drivers. 2. MARCH. The drivers will keep their relative position, so that at the command FORWARD, they will move accurately in column in the primitive direction. TO FORM LINE. 311. To the front. The column being in march, or at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Drivers, forward into line, right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. Left (or right) DRESS. 4. FRONT. At the command MARCH, the leading driver advances 5 yards, and halts. The other drivers oblique to the right (or left) until opposite their positions in line, then move forward and form at the proper distance, on the right (or left) of the preceding drivers, and dress. 312. To the right or left. The column being in march or at a halt, the instructor commands.: 1. Drivers, right (or left) into line, wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. Each driver wheels to the right, (or left,) as prescribed in No. 294, and halts at the command, which should be given when the horses are in the new direction. The instructor then aligns them. 313. On the right or left. The instructor commands: 1. Drivers, on the right (or left) into line. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. 4. Right (or left) DRESS. 5. FRONT. At the command MARCH, the leading driver wheels to the SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 203 right, moves forward, and halts at the command of the instructor, which should be given when he has unmasked the column. The other drivers continue to advance, wheel to the right in succession, so as to take their places in line on the left of the preceding one, and dress. The instructor gives the command Right-DRESS, as soon as the first driver halts. As soon as the last driver is aligned, he commands FRONT. TO ADVANCE IN LINE. 314. The instructor commands: 1. Drivers, forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide RIGHT (or LEFT.) At the first command, gather the horses, at the second move forward, preserving the intervals, and dressing on the guide. To halt. When marching in line, the instructor commands: 1. Drivers. 2. HALT. TO OBLIQUE IN LINE. 315. The instructor commands: 1. Drivers, right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH. Which is executed in the same manner as the oblique in column, except that the drivers, dressing towards the right, (or left,) and moving in the same direction, keep in such position with respect to each other that, at the command FORWARD, they will move to the front in a line parallel to the primitive one. TO MARCH TO A FLANK. 316. The drivers being in line, in march, or at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Drivers, by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. Each driver wheels to the right (or left) at the command MARCH, and at the command FORWARD, moves to the front. 204 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. The drivers being in column, the commands are: 1. Column by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide RIGHT (or LEFT.) TO REVERSE IN MARCHING. 31T. The drivers being in'line, the instructor commands: 1. Drivers, right (or left) reverse. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide RIGHT (or LEFT.) The movement is executed as prescribed in No. 296, except that at the third and fourth commands the drivers move to the front, dressing on the guide. The drivers being in column, the commands are: 1. Drivers, right (or left) reverse. 2. MARCH. 3. Column-FORWARD. CHANGE OF GAIT. 318. When the drivers have become accustomed to the management of a pair of horses at a walk, they will be practised at a trot, and occasionally at a gallop. To trot, the instructor commands: 1. Trot. 2. MARCH. At the first command, the driver gathers his horses. At the command MARCH, he takes the trot gradually, using for the near horse the means prescribed for the cannoneer, at the same time advancing the coupling rein with the right hand. If the off horse does not obey this, the whip may be threatened, and, if necessary, used. When the horse obeys, replace the hand. At the command Trot out-MARCH, the horses are urged to a rapid trot, and the gait maintained if necessary by the whip and spur. At the command Gallop-MARCH, they are urged to the gallop, which gait is maintained until ordered to be changed. To pass from the gallop to the trot, the commands are: Trot MARCH. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 205 To pass from the trot out to the trot, the commands are: Slow trot, MARCH. To pass to a walk, the commands are: Walk, MARCH. 319. To move at the rapid gaits from a halt, the commands Trot, etc. should be added to the first commands, so as to immediately precede those of execution. All changes of gait should be made gradually, TO PASS FROM THE REAR TO THE HEAD OF THE COLUMN AND THE REVERSE. 320. To accustom the horses to leave and enter the column, and to ensure the proper control of their motions, the instructor will occasionally cause the drivers to pass from the rear to the head of the column and the reverse. To execute this movement, he commands: 1. Rear driver to head of column. 2. MARCH. At the first command, the rear driver gathers his horses; at the second, he obliques to the right until out of the column, moves forward, and takes his position as head of the column by obliquing to the left. The movement is executed at a trot when the column is moving at a walk, and at a trot out or gallop when it is moving at a trot, the driver resuming the primitive gait upon entering the column. Each driver will be directed in succession to pass to the head of the column. To pass from the head to the rear of the column, the instructor commands: 1. Leading driver to rear of column. 2. MARCH. At the first command, the leading driver gathers his horses. At the command MARCH, he reverses to the right, moves to the rear, and reverses again to the right in time to re-enter the column at his proper distance. The movement is executed at the gait of the column. 321. The drivers are rested as prescribed for the cannoneers, No. 184 and No. 185. s p:'A.T 1TV_ SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 322. THE object of this school is the instruction of the section in all its duties preparatory to its entering the battery of manceuvre. This instruction is given by the chief of section under the direction of the captain. Each section consists of two pieces with their caissons, and the men, horses, and materiel required for their service. The chiefs of sections are at all times responsible to their captain for the instruction, good appearance, and serviceable condition of everything belonging or attached to their sections. The chiefs of pieces are in like manner responsible to the chiefs of sections for their pieces and everything pertaining to them. The gunner is responsible to the chief of his piece for the good order of the gun, its carriage, limber, and equipments, and for the instruction of the cannoneers in their duties at the piece. He will hold each of them responsible for the condition of the equipments belonging to his number. The chief of caisson (No. 8) is responsible to the chief of the piece for the caisson, its equipments, and the condition of the ammunition and other supplies belonging to it. The drivers are directly responsible, each for his horses, har-. ness, and equipments, to the chief of the piece. It is the duty of both drivers and cannoneers to report at once to chiefs of pieces, any injury to their horses, or materiel, or any deficiency in the equipments. As soon as such injury or deficiency becomes known to the chiefs of pieces, they will at once take the necessary steps to remedy it, reporting the facts to their chiefs of section. (206) SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 207 ARTICLE FIRST. EXERCISE OF SEVERAL DETACHMENTS. Formation of Detachments and Posts of Officers. 323. THE gun detachments, properly told off, are drawn up in line corresponding to the positions of their pieces in park, and touching each other. The cannoneers composing each of them retain their numbers, and are kept in a fixed relation to each other when in rank and file formation; but the detachment itself constitutes a unit. No notice is taken of inversions; the actual right and left detachments being the right and left of the line, which may be formed from column by throwing the rear detachments either to the right or left of the leading one. 324. When the detachments are in line, the gunners are posted on the right of the front rank; when in column, they are I yard in front of the centre; and whenfaced byflank, they are in their proper positions in the front rank. When the chiefs of pieces are present, they act as gunners, the latter taking their places I yard in rear of the right files of their respective detachments, and resuming their positions when the chiefs of pieces are out of the ranks. The officers, when present, are posted as follows:-Chiefs of sections. In line, 2 yards in front. In column of detachments, 2 yards outside the wheeling flank. By flank, 2 yards from the front rank, in all cases opposite the centres of their sections, except that when faced by flank the chief of the leading section marches at the side of the leading man. The chief of caissons. In line, 4 yards in rear of the centre. In column, or by flank, 4 yards from the centre of the column, on the side opposite the chiefs of sections. 208 SCHOOL OF TIE SECTION. ALIGNMENTS. 325. The detachments are aligned by the instructor, as directed in No. 35, at the commands: 1. Bight (or left) DRESS. 2. FRONT. TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANKS. 326. To open the ranks, the instructor commands: 1. To the rear, open order. 2. MARCH. 3. Right-IDREss. 4. FRONT. At the first command, the gunners step back briskly 5 yards, and halt opposite their places in line. The remainder of the movement is executed as directed in No. 57. At the command FRONT, the gunners resume their positions in the front rank. To close the ranks, the instructor commands: 1. Close order. 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, the rear rank closes on the front.'TO BREAK INTO COLUMN TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 327. The instructor commands: 1. By detachment, Bight-wHEEL. 2. MARCH. 3. HEALT. At the first command, the gunners step briskly 1 yard to the front of the centres of their detachments, face towards them, and repeat the commands in succession after the instructor. They are executed as prescribed in No. 45. As soon as each detachment is halted, its gunner dresses it to the left, the guides covering each other at distances equal to the front of a detachment, and then takes his place in column. The line is broken into column to the left on the same principles. MARCH IN COLUMN. 328. To put the column in motion, the instructor commands: 1. Column-FORWARD. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide left (or right.) SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 209 The commands FORWARD, MARCH, and Guide left, are repeated by the gunners. The guide of each detachment marches in the steps of the one preceding him, keeping his proper distance accurately. The leading guide marches steadily to the front, in the direction given by the instructor. 329. When the instructor, after wheeling the detachments into column, wishes to put them in motion without halting, instead of commanding HALT, as prescribed in No. 327, he commands: 3. Column, FORWARD. 4. Guide left (or right.) The gunner repeats the command FORWARD, and that for the guide. TO IALT THE COLUMN. 330. The instructor commands': Column-HALT. The command HALT is repeated by the gunners. CHANGE OF DIRECTION IN COLUMN. 331. The column marching, the instructor commands: HEAD Or COLUMN TO THE LEFT. At this command, the gunner of the leading detachment wheels it to the left, and commands FORWARD as the movement is completed. The other detachments wheel in succession on the same ground as the first, and at the same commands from the gunners, the men taking care not to commence the wheel until the command is given. To change direction to the right, the movement is executed on the same principles. TO MARCH BY A FLANK WHEN IN COLUMN. 332. The column marching, the instructor commands: 1. Column by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide left (or right.) At the command by the right flank, MARCH, repeated by the 14 s2 210 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. gunners, the detachments face and continue the march. The gunners take their places at the sides of their leading files, dress on the guides, and preserve the intervals. The officers face with the detachments, and maintain their relative positions. 333. To resume the primitive direction, the instructor commands: 1. By the left (or right) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. Column forward. 4. Guide right (or left.) At the command MARCH, the detachments face as directed. The gunners repeat the commands, and resume their places in column. OBLIQUE MARCH IN COLUMN. 334. The column marching, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, left (or right) oblique. 2. MARCH. The gunners repeat the commands in succession after the instructor, and each detachment obliques as prescribed in No. 54. The guide of the front rank of the leading detachment is the guide of the column. The other guides move in the same direc. tion and keep on a line with him, so that at the command FORWARD, they will cover each other accurately at proper distances. The primitive direction is resumed at the commands: 1. FORWARD. 2. Guide left (or right.) Given by the instructor, and repeated by the gunners. BEING IN COLUMN TO FORM LINE. 335. To the front, gaining ground to the left. The column being in march, or at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Forward into line, left oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. 4. FRONT. At the first command, the leading gunner commands FORWARD, and the others, Cannoneers, left oblique. At the command MARCH, repeated by the gunners, the leading detachment advances 18 yards, and is halted by the gunner, who commands RightDRESS, and takes his place in line. The other detachments oblique SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 211 until each is opposite its proper position, when its gunner commands FORWARD; Guide right; halts it abreast of the leading detachment, commands Bight-DREss, and takes his place in line. The instructor aligns the detachments and commands FRONT. 336. To the front, gaining ground to the right. The line is formed on the right of the leading detachment, on the same principles, at the commands: 1. Forward into line, right oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide left. 4. FRONT. The gunners oblique their detachments to the right; halt them abreast of the leading detachment; command Left-DRESS, and take their positions in line, which is on the right of their respective detachments. 331. On the right or left. The instructor commands: 1. On right into line. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. 4. FRONT. At the first command, the leading gunner commands: Right wheel, and at the second, which he repeats, wheels his detachment to the right, marches it forward until it unmasks the column, halts it, commands Bight-DRESS, and takes his place in line. The other gunners repeat the commands for the guide, wheel their detachments to the right as soon as they are opposite the left of the preceding one, move them forward, halt them on the line, command Right-DREss, and take their places in line. As soon as the detachments are properly aligned, the instructor commands FRONT. The detachments are formed in line on the left according to the same principles; at the commands: 1. On left into line. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide left. 4. FRONT, the gunners command Left-DREss as soon as their detachments halt, and take their places in line on the right. 338. To the right or left. The instructor commands: 1. Right (or left) into line, wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. 4. Left (or right) DRESS. 212 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. The commands Right (or left) wheel, MARCH, and HALT, are repeated by the gunners, who take their places in both cases on the right as soon as the movement is executed. The instructor then aligns the detachments by the commands: Right (or left) DRESS, FRONT. 339. In all formations and changes of front in line the officers promptly take their proper positions, passing, if necessary, through the intervals during the execution of the movements. TO FORM LINE ADVANCING. 340. The column marching at a walk, to form the detachments in line gaining ground to the left, and to continue the march, the instructor commands: 1. Form line advancing-left oblique-double quick. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. The leading gunner repeats the command for the guide, and his detachment continues the march; the other gunners command Left oblique-double quick, and MARCH, in succession after the instructor. As soon as each detachment has obliqued sufficiently, its gunner gives the command FORWARD-guide right, when it moves directly to the front, and on arriving upon the line resumes the ordinary step; the officers and gunners taking their positions in line. The movement is performed gaining ground to the right on the same principles, the commands of the instructor being: 1. Form line advancing-right oblique-double quick 2. MARCH. 3. Guide left. TO ADVANCE IN LINE. 341. The instructor commands: 1. Section, (or -,) forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide left (or right.) Which are executed according to the principles laid down in No. 50, the gunners remaining in their positions in line, which are always on the right of their detachments. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 213 To halt, the instructor commands: Section, (or -,) HALT. OBLIQUE IN LINE. 342. This movement is executed according to the principles prescribed in No. 54. For a detachment the commands are: 1. Cannoneers, left (or right) oblique. 2. MARCH. TO CHANGE DIRECTION IN LINE. 343. The movements are according to the principles laid down in Nos. 45, 46, and 47; the commands are: 1. Section, (or -,) left (or right) wheel (or reverse.) 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. Or, 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide left (or right.) TO MARCH BY A FLANK WHEN IN LINE. 344. To the right or left. The line marching, the instructor commands: 1. Section, (or -,) by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. At the command MARCH, the detachments face and continue the march; the gunners remaining in the front rank. The chief of the leading section places himself at the side of the leading gunner or file. If the line is at a halt, it is first faced to the right, or left, by the command from the instructor: Section, (or -, ) right (or left) face. And then put in motion by the command: 1. Column, forward. 2. MARCH. The chief of the leading section takes his place at the side of the leading gunner, or file, at the first command. 345. The march in line in the primitive direction is resumed at the command: 1. Column, by the left (or right) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide right (or left.) 214 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 346. To the front. The instructor commands: 1. Section, (or -,) by the right flank by file left, (or by the left fank by file right.) 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. The movement is executed as prescribed in No. 52 for a detachment. TO CHANGE DIRECTION WHEN FACED BY A FLANK. 347. The movement is executed on the principles laid down in Nos. 39 and 50 for a single detachment. MARCHING BY A FLANK TO FORM COLUMN OF DETACHMENTS. 348. The instructor commands: FORM DETACHMENTS. At this command, each gunner forms his detachment into line, as prescribed in No. 53. The instructor then gives the command for the guide, which is repeated by the gunners. TO PASS FROM THE MARCH IN COLUMN TO THE MARCH BY FLANK. 349. The instructor commands: 1. By the right flank, byfile left. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. At the command MARCH, repeated by the gunners, each detachment faces to the right, and then turns to the left, the gunners taking their posts in the ranks. The column is marched by a flank, with the left in front, on the same principles, at the command: 1. By the left flank, by file left. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. The gunners taking their positions next to No. 2 in the ranks. MARCHING BY FLANK TO FORM LINE. 350. Detachments are first formed as prescribed in No. 348, SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 215 after which they are formed in line, as prescribed in No. 335, and following. TO FORM THE LINE OR COLUMN FACED IN THE OPPOSITE DIRECTION. 351. The line or column being in march or at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Detachments, right (or left) reverse. 2. MARCH. 3. IALT. 4. Left (or right) DRESS. 5. FRONT. The commands are repeated by the gunners, and each detachment executes the reverse, as prescribed in No. 46. If the detachments are in column, the officers do not change sides; but if they are in line, the officers pass through one of the intervals during the execution of the movements, so as to take their proper positions in line. If the instructor wishes the detachments to move forward in the new direction, instead of the command HALT, etc., he commands FORWARD, or column FORWARD, as the reverse is about being completed, and adds the command for the guide. TO MARCH TO THE REAR. 352. The detachments being in line or in column, to gain ground to the rear, the same commands are used as in No. 55, the command for the guide being always given after that of execution. In this case the officers face to the rear at the proper commands, but do not pass through the line to take position. POSTING THE DETACHMENTS WITH THEIR PIECES. 353. The detachments are marched to the battery either in column or in line, as circumstances may require. If approaching in column, in a direction parallel to the battery, the instructor, when near it, commands: DETACHMENTS, OPPOSITE YOUR PIECES. 216 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. Each detachment is halted by its gunner when opposite its piece, and wheeled into line. Approaching from the front or rear, the detachments are formed in line facing the battery, in the same order as their pieces, and the instructor commands: DETACHMENTS, OPPOSITE YOUR PIECES. Each is wheeled or faced in the proper direction by its gunner, marched opposite to its piece, and formed in line, as directed in No. 120. The cannoneers are then posted and exercised together at their duties in the manual of the piece, and mechanical manceuvres, under the direction of the officer commanding as instructor. EXECUTION OF THE MOVEMENTS AT THE DOUBLE QUICK. 354. The movements directed in the exercise for several detachments, may be made in double quick time, and the ordinary time resumed according to the principles of No. 61. EXERCISE OF THE SECTION AND OF THE COMPANY. 355. When the section, division, or company is paraded, the principles laid down in the Article Exercise of Several Detachments apply. The commands are modified to suit the circumstances, the terms section, company, etc., being used to designate the line. In the exercises, the platoon or sections may be made the unit at the pleasure of the instructor. The movements are conducted on the same principles as when the detachment is the unit, with the modifications in the words of command rendered necessary by the circumstances. In line or in column of sections, either when marching or at a halt, to form faced in the opposite direction, the reverse may be executed by platoon or by section. In column of platoons the reverse should be executed by platoon. It may be executed by detachment in all cases, but this mode of changing the front should not be resorted to except in cases of necessity, or when the gun detachments only are paraded. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 217 ARTICLE SECOND. EXERCISE OF SEVERAL DETACHMENTS-HORSE ARTILLERY. Formation of Detachments and Posts of Officers, etc. 356. THE detachments, properly told off, are drawn up in line corresponding to the position of their pieces in park, and touching each other. The cannoneers, as in dismounted detachments, retain their numbers and relative positions, but each detachment constitutes a unit, and no notice is taken of inversions in the manceuvres. When the chiefs of sections are not present, there is an assistant instructor, who is mounted. 357. In line or column of detachments, the gunners are on the right of their respective detachments in the front rank. Each constitutes a file, unless the chiefs of pieces are present, in which case the latter take their places on the right of the front rank, the gunners covering them in the rear rank and completing the files. 358. The officers, when two or more sections are united, are posted as directed for dismounted detachments, except that in column of detachments the chief of the leading section is 2 yards in front of the centre of the column. The assistant instructor is posted: In line, 4 yards in front of the centre of the detachments. In column, 2 yards in front of the centre of the leading detachment. By fanc, at the side of the leading file. TO MOUNT AND DISMOUNT. 359. (PLATE 22, Fig. 1.) The detachments are mounted and dismounted as in Nos. 232 and 233. T 218 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. ALIGNMENTS. 360. The detachments are aligned as in No. 238. TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANKS. 361. The ranks are opened and closed as in Nos. 242 and 243. TO BREAK INTO COLUMN. 362. To the front. The detachments being in line at a halt, to break from the right, the instructor commands: 1. By detachment from the right-front into column. 2. MARCH. 3. GUIDE left. At the command MARCH, the right detachment moves to the front, the assistant instructor taking his place 2 yards in front of its centre. The other detachments gather their horses and move off in succession, each as soon as the haunches of the horse of the rear rank of the detachment on its right are on a line with the heads of its own front rank horses. They move directly to the front 6 yards, and then oblique to the right, as prescribed in No. 279, until they intersect the column, when, by a left oblique, they enter it, and resume the dress towards the guide. The gait is so regulated that upon entering the column there should be 2 yards distance between the detachments. The detachments are broken into column from the left, according to the same principles. The commands are: 1. By detachment from the left-front into column. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. 363. If the detachments are marching in line, the commands of the instructor are: 1. By the right, (or left,) break into detachments. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide left (or right.) At the command MARCH, all the detachments except the right (or left) halt, if they are marching at a walk; or walk, if they are marching at a trot, and the movement is completed as in No. 362, SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 219 each detachment resuming the original gait, to commence the movement. 364. To the right or left. The detachment being in line, at a halt or in march, the instructor commands: 1. By detachment, right (or left) wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide LEFT (or RIGHT.) At the command MARCH, each detachment executes the wheel as in No. 275, and moves to the front at the command FORWARD, so regulating the gait that there shall be a distance of 2 yards between the detachments. MARCH IN COLUMN. 365. The guide of the leading detachment marches steadily to the front, and in such manner as to keep his detachment 2 yards behind the assistant instructor. The other guides follow accurately the leading one at such distances that there shall be a space of 2 yards between the detachments. If the distances are lost, they will be regained gradually. TO HALT THE COLUMN. 366. The instructor commands: Column-HALT. To resume the march in column, the commands are: 1. Column, forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide LEFT (or RIGHT.) CHANGE OF DIRECTION IN COLUMN. 361. The column marching, the instructor commands: Head of column to the right (or left.) The assistant instructor commands: 1. Right (or left) wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. The leading detachment wheels to the right at the command MARCH, and, at the command FORWARD, moves to its front; the 220 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. other detachments wheel, on reaching the same ground, without further commands. The assistant instructor should give the first command in time to command MARCH, when the detachment is 2 yards from the turning point, as that distance to the front is gained in wheeling. An oblique phange of direction is executed on the same principles, at the commands from the instructor: Head of column, right (or left) half-wheel. OBLIQUE MARCH IN COLUMN. 368. The column marching, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, each detachment obliques, as prescribed in No. 279. The guide of the leading detachment is the guide of the column. The other guides move in the same direction, and keep on a line with him, so that at the command FORWARD, they will cover each other accurately at proper distances. The primitive direction is resumed at the commands: 1. FORWARD. 2. Guide left (or right.) THE COLUMN MARCHING TO FACE IT IN THE OPPOSITE DIRECTION. 369. The column being in march, the instructor commands: 1. Detachments, right (or left) reverse. 2. MARCH. 3. Column, FORWARD. 4. Guide right (or left.) At the command MARCH, each detachment executes the reverse at the gait at which it is marching, and the assistant instructor passes to the head of the column. At the command FORWARD, the column marches to its front. If the chiefs of sections are present, they do not change to the other side of the column, but each executes the reverse on his own ground. The chief of the section which has become the leading one takes his place at the head of the column, the one SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 221 who has been at the head of the column returning to his proper place on the flank. BEING IN COLUMN TO FORM LINE. 370. To the front, gaining ground to the left. The column being in march or at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Forward into line, left oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. 4. FRONT. At the command MARCH, the leading detachment advances 14 yards, and is halted by the assistant instructor, who then commands Bight-DRESS, and takes his place in line. The other detachments oblique to the left until opposite their places in line, when they move to the front, dressing to the right, and form in succession on the left of the preceding detachment. 371. To.the front, gaining ground to the right. The line is formed on the same principles, at the commands from the instructor: 1. Forward into line, right oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide left. 4. FRONT. The detachments, obliquing to the right, form in succession on the right of the leading detachment, and dress to the left. 372. On the right (or left.) Being in march, the instructor commands: 1. On the right into line. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. 4. FRONT. At the command MARCH, the leading detachment wheels to the right, advances until it has unmasked the column, and is halted by the assistant instructor, who then commands Right-DREss, and takes his place in line. The other detachments continue the march, dressing to the right; wheel in succession opposite their proper positions, on the left of the first, advance to the line, halt, and dress to the right. The detachments are formed in line on the left according to the same principles, the commands being: T 2 222 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 1. On the left into line. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide left. 4. FRONT. 373. To the right or left. The detachments being in march, the instructor commands: 1. Bight into line, wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. 4. Left-DREss. 5. FRONT. At the command MARCH, the leading detachment wheels to the right. When it has unmasked the column, the assistant instructor commands HALT, Left-DRESS, and takes his place in line. The other detachments wheel in succession opposite their proper positions, advance and take their places in line, on the right of the first, dressing to the left. In all the formations into line the instructor gives the commands for the guide, immediately after the command MARCH, and the command FRONT as soon as the last detachment is aligned. TO FORM LINE ADVANCING. 374. The column marching at a walk, to form the detachments in line gaining ground to the left, and to continue the march, the instructor commands: 1. Form line advancing-left oblique-trot. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. At the command MARCH, the leading detachment continues to advance at a walk. The other detachments oblique at a trot until opposite their positions, and then move forward, and form in succession on the left of the first, resuming the walk as they reach the line, and dressing to the right. The assistant instructor repeats the command for the guide, and takes his position in line. When the column is marching at a trot, the movement is executed on the same principles; but the instructor does not add trot to the first command. The assistant instructor gives the commands walk and MARCH to the leading detachment in succession, after the first and second commands of the instructor; repeats that for the guide; and takes his place in line. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 223 The movement is executed so as to gain ground to the right, on the same principles. TO ADVANCE IN LINE. 375. The instructor commands: 1. Section, (or -,) forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right (or left.) These commands are executed, as in No. 262, at the different gaits, the assistant instructor keeping his position in line. The guide should never put himself in motion suddenly, and should pass gradually from a slow to a quick gait, or from a quick to a slow gait. He should move carefully and steadily in the direction indicated, taking up points in advance by which to regulate his march. These points should be in a line perpendicular to the front of the detachments. OBLIQUE IN LINE. 376. The detachment being in line, to cause it to gain ground to the front and towards one of its flanks, without a change of front, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH. These commands are executed as prescribed in No. 376 for a single detachment. When sufficient distance has been gained towards the flank, the instructor commands FORWARD. TO CHANGE DIRECTION IN LINE. 371. The detachments being in march, or at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Section, (or -,) right wheel (or reverse, etc.) 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. These commands are executed as prescribed in Nos. 275, 276, and 217, for a single detachment, except that the radius of the arc described by the pivot is about eight yards, so that the arc in the wheel is twelve yards; in the reverse, twenty-four yards; and in the half-wheel, six yards. 224 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. MARCHING IN LINE TO MARCH IN THE OPPOSITE DIRECTION. 378. The instructor commands: 1. Detachments, right (or left) reverse. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide right (or left.) At the command MARCH, each detachment executes the reverse without confusion, and as it is about being completed, the instructor commands FORWARD, and adds the command for the guide. When the detachment presents a front of less than five men, this movement will be difficult or impossible to execute. In such case the instructor will cause the reverse to be executed by section instead of by detachment. It would generally be better to execute the change of front by section. The officers pass through the line during the execution of the movement, and take their proper positions. TO MARCH BY FILE. 379. The detachments being in line are marched by file. To the front. (PLATE 22.) According to the principles and by the commands prescribed in Nos. 245 and 247. To the right or left. (PLATE 19, Fig. 4.) According to the principles and by the commands prescribed in Nos. 246 and 247. CIHANGE OF DIRECTION IN FILE. 380. The detachments marching by file, the direction is changed by the commands and means prescribed in No. 249. TO HALT AND TO MOVE OFF. 381. The column is halted and moved forward again as prescribed in No. 250. OBLIQUE IN FILE. 382. The oblique is executed at the commands and by the means prescribed in Nos. 251 and 252 for a single detachment. — c -- C —. --— C- c — cz-~~~~~~~~~~~o ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ G ----- -0 — 7> —— > N -------- --- c > -^ ~ a; —{3 ----------— *Gs -- @b^Fe A -- - - - -c \ ICENSX G- ~ -- — n N o-C ^ —-------- "C c = —----------, C- > —{ —------- " " "'. -. - -,,...c " " " — - -.^\`-c ~<=>~- ii *Ca> — -~ —---- — ~ \ \ ^\ ~ -, \S <3c4 -Q-C> — A >- - c -m -- 2>0 - ~c^-c>~-~"-~<~, SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 225 CHANGES OF GAIT. 383. The gaits are changed as prescribed in Nos. 281 and 282. TO BREAK INTO SINGLE FILE. 384. When the column is marching in double files, it may be formed in single files, as prescribed in No. 253. The detachment being in line may be moved to the front in single file by the commands and means prescribed in No. 254. TO FORM DOUBLE FILES. 385. The column is formed in double files as prescribed in No. 255. TO FORM LINE. 386. When the detachments are marching by flank, the line may be formed as prescribed in Nos. 256, 257, 258, and 259, provided it does not change the relative positions of the cannoneers in the detachments. 387. The foregoing movements are executed by the detachments as if they constituted a single detachment. When marching by a flank, the line may be formed directly as in No. 386, but it would always be better first to form the column of detachments, and afterwards form this column into line by the means prescribed in No. 370, and following. MARCHING BY A FLANK TO FORM COLUMN OF DETACHMENTS. 388. The instructor commands: 1. Form detachments. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right (or left.) At the first command, all the detachments except the leading one halt, if they are marching at a walk, or walk if they are marching at a trot. At the command MARCH, the leading detachment forms as directed in No. 256. The other detachments take up the move15 226 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. ment in succession, at the original gait, as soon as the cannoneers of the one in front of them begin the oblique. The gait is regulated so as to take their proper distances promptly, but without confusion. The instructor gives the command for the guide as soon as the leading detachment is formed. IN COLUMN OF DETACHMENTS TO MARCH BY FILE. 389. The instructor commands: 1. Double files, from the right (or left.) 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, all the detachments except the leading one halt, if the column is marching at a walk, or walk if it is marching at a trot. The leading detachment forms in double files as in No. 247, the others taking up the movement in succession at the original gait, and closing to the proper distances. POSTING THE DETACHMENTS WITH THEIR PIECES. 390. The detachments are marched to the park, either in column or line, and posted at their pieces as directed in No. 353, or, should it be more convenient, they may be marched each in rear of the teams belonging to its piece. When the nature of the ground requires, the detachments are halted outside the park and marched to their posts successively as the pieces file out. The position of the detachment is habitually in rear of its piece, but positions may be changed by the means laid down in No. 122. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 22 ARTICLE THIRD. EXERCISE OF SEVERAL PIECES. The Team. 391. THE team consists of two or more pairs of horses, with their drivers. In manceuvring with empty ammunition chests, two pairs are considered to be sufficient. With full chests, or for the road, three pairs are required, and for the heavier classes of field guns four pairs. The instruction is given for three pairs; they are denominated the lead, middle, and wheel horses. At first not more than four teams should be united; but as soon as the drivers are sufficiently instructed, the number may be increased to six or eight. The instructor is mounted. He is aided by one assistant, also mounted, to every two teams, who will see that all the movements are properly performed by the teams under their charge. In the movements, the instructor goes wherever his presence may be necessary. In line, the assistants take post each on a line with the lead drivers, and midway between their teams. In column, they are 4 yards from the left flank, and opposite the centres of their teams, with the exception of the assistant, whose teams are at the head of the column, who takes post on the left of the leading driver. ARRANGEMENT OF THE TEAMS. 392. The drivers, dismounted, are in one rank, each preserving an interval of 2 feet between his off horse and the near horse of the man on his right. The leading horses are on the 228 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. right, and the wheel horses on the left in each team; this rule is invariable. When the pieces are parked in more than one line, the teams of the second line are placed, each on the left of the corresponding team in the first; the teams of the third line are placed in like manner on the left of the teams of the second, and so on; the teams of the same file of carriages being always drawn up in the same line, from the right to the left. The teams may be drawn up in two or more lines if the nature of the ground requires it, The drivers couple their horses without command, and the instructor, after aligning them, causes them to mount as prescribed, and commands: 1. Right-DRESS. 2. FRONT. The drivers align themselves, each preserving an interval of 2 feet between his off horse and the near horse of the driver on his right. The assistant instructors are 4 yards in rear of the centres of their teams. TO BREAK INTO COLUMN. 393. The instructor commands: 1. By team from the right-front into column. 2. MARCH. (PLATE 23, Fig. 1.) At the command MARCH, the lead driver on the right, and all the others in succession, execute the movement explained in No. 307, each driver regulating the obliquity of his march according to his distance from the right. The column is broken from the left at the command: 1. By team from the left-front into column. 2. MARCH. (PLATE 23, Fig. 2.) At the command MARCH, the lead driver of the left team moves to the front and is followed by the other drivers of this team, who break successively, as has been prescribed; the lead driver of the second team from the left commences his movement in time to get his proper distance in the column and is followed in succession by the other drivers of this SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 229 team; and so on to the right, the drivers regulating the obliquity of their march by their distance from the left flank. TO CHANGE DIRECTION IN COLUMN. 394. The instructor commands: Head of column to the right (or left.) The assistant instructor at the head of the column commands: 1. Right (or left) wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. And the change of direction is executed by the teams in succession on the same ground as in No. 308. TO HALT THE COLUMN. 395. The instructor commands: Column-HALT. The column halts as in No. 309. To resume the march in column, the instructor commands: 1. Column forward. 2. MARCH. OBLIQUE IN COLUMN. 396. The instructor commands: 1. Teams right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, the lead driver in each team obliques to the right and moves in the oblique direction. He is followed by his middle and wheel drivers, who turn on the same ground and follow in his tracks, so that each team is formed in columns of pairs. The lead drivers keep on a line with each other, and at such distances, that at the command FORWARD, they will move accurately in column in the primitive direction. The oblique to the left is executed according to the same principles. ~u 230 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. TO FORM LINE. 397. To the front. The teams, being in column, in march, or at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Forward into line-left oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. 4. FRONT. At the command MARCH, the lead team advances 18 yards, and is halted by its assistant instructor. The other teams oblique to the left, as in No. 396, and when they have gained sufficient ground in that direction, each in succession moves forward, places itself on the line 9 yards from the team which preceded it, and dresses to the right. The assistant instructors oblique with the teams and take their places in line. The line is formed gaining ground to the right on the same principles. 398. To the right or left. Being in march, or at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Right (or left) into line, wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. 4. Bight-DRESs. 5. FRONT. At the command MARCH, the lead drivers each execute a wheel to the right, as in No. 294, except that when the wheel is comnpleted they move straight to the front. They are followed by the middle and wheel drivers, who wheel successively on the same ground and follow in the tracks of the leaders. As soon as the wheel drivers are in the new direction, the instructor commands: 3. HALT; 4. Bight-DRESS, and the assistants take their places in line. The line is formed to the left according to the same principles. 399. On the right or left. Being in march, the instructor commands: 1. On the right into line. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. 4. FRONT. At the command MARCH, the lead team wheels to the right, moves forward, and when it has unmasked the column, is halted by its assistant instructor. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 231 The other teams continue to advance. Each passes the one immediately preceding it, wheels to the right, and forms 9 yards on its left, the assistant instructors taking their places in line. The teams are formed on the left into line according to the same principles. 400. In the formations into line, the instructor gives the commands for the guide immediately after the command MARCH, and the command FRONT as soon as the last team is aligned. The alignment is made on the lead drivers. TO FORM LINE ADVANCING. 401. The column marching, the line of teams is formed in continuing the march, gaining ground to the right or the left by the commands and according to the principles of No. 374, the teams preserving their intervals of 9 yards in line. TO ADVANCE IN LINE. 402. The instructor commands: 1. Teams-forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right (or left.) The teams move forward, dressing upon the guide indicated. The lead drivers maintain the dress and intervals; the middle and wheel drivers, preserving their distances of 2 feet from head to croup, follow in their tracks. Whilst marching in line, in order to secure the proper control of the movements of their horses, the instructor will occasionally cause the drivers to move from the front to the rear of the teams, and the reverse. For this purpose he commands, Lead driver to the rear. The driver designated reverses in a direction opposite to the guide, and, by another reverse, takes his place in rear of the team. The middle driver gathers his horses, keeps them direct to the front, ard becomes responsible for the dress and intervals. He is passed in his turn to the rear, at the command, Middle driver to the rear, when the wheel driver keeps the dress and intervals 232 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. until passed to the rear by the command, Wheel driver to the rear. In passing from rear to front, at the commands, Rear (or -) driver to the front, the driver invariably obliques to the right, quickens the gait, and takes his place at the head of the team by inclining to the left. To advance in line of teams from the position occupied by the pairs in No. 392, the commands are the same. At the command MARCH, all the lead drivers advance, dressing towards the guide, and gradually opening out to 9 yards. The middle and wheel drivers form in column behind the lead drivers, as already directed. TO HALT. 403. The teams being in line, the instructor commands: Teams-HALT. 404. The teams being formed and in line, are broken into column from the right or left by the commands and according to the principles of No. 393, the middle and wheel drivers following in the tracks of their leaders, and the latter commencing the movement in time to take their proper positions in column without disorder. TO MARCH BY A FLANK. 405. The teams being in line, in march, or at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Teams, by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. Column-FORWARD. If the teams are in column, the commands are: 1. Column, by the right (or left flank.) 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide right (or left.) Each team executes the wheel and moves forward, the assistants taking their proper positions. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 233 OBLIQUE IN LINE. 406. The teams being in line, in march, or at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Teams, right (or left) oblique. 2. MARCH; which are executed as prescribed in No. 396. During the oblique, the guide is on the flank towards which the oblique is made. At the command FORWARD, the guide reverts to the original flank, or, if the oblique commenced from a halt, the command for the guide will be added to the command FORWARD. THE REVERSE. 407. The teams being in line or in column, in march or at a halt, to form, faced in the opposite direction, the instructor commands: 1. Teams, right (or left) reverse. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. At the command MARCH, the lead drivers execute the reverse and move forward, as in No. 317, at the gait at which they were marching when the movement commenced. The middle and wheel drivers, preserving their distances, execute the reverse on the same ground, and follow in the tracks of the leaders. When they are all accurately in the new direction, the instructor commands HALT, or Column, HALT. If he wishes to move forward at the completion of the reverse, instead of the command HALT, the instructor commands: FORWARD, Guide right, (or left,) or Column, FORWARD, as the case may be. CHANGES OF GAIT. 408. The movement at the different gaits are executed according to the principles and by the commands laid down in No. 318. TO REST. 409. The teams being in line or column, are halted, the drivers dismounted, and the rest ordered as in No. 184. To rest in marching, the means prescribed in No. 185 are used. u2 234 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. TO FILE OFF. 410. The teams being in line, in front of the stables or picket, the drivers are dismounted, and file off as in No. 300. If the teams approach the parade or picket by a flank, the drivers may be formed into line on the right or left in the same order as in No. 392 by the commands and means prescribed in Nos. 312 and 313. THE PIECE HORSED. 411. From four to eight pieces may be united for instruction. As the movements of the carriages of the pieces and caissons are the same, the caissons may be horsed and considered as pieces. There is an assistant instructor to every two carriages. Their posts'in line or column are the same as directed for the teams; they see that all the movements are correctly performed. The carriages are taken in park, either in one line, or, as usually parked, with the caissons in rear of their pieces. The teams are always formed as if the carriages were in one line, the teams of the rear carriages on the left of those of the leading carriages of the same file. TO ENTER THE PARK. 412. The teams being formed in line, and in the same order as the carriages to which they belong, approach the park as circumstances require. If they are to enter by its left, they are broken into column from the right. If they are to enter the park by the right, they are broken into column from the left. The instructor directs the column towards the flank of the park, and when its head is near the first carriage, he commands: 1. Teams, to your posts. 2. MARCH. (PLATE 23, Fig. 3.) At the command MARCH, the column takes such a direction as will lead it in front of and near the poles of the carriages, and parallel to the line of the park; each team, when within 3 yards of its carriage, changes its direction to the left, and halts. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 235 If there are several lines of carriages, the teams of the second break off from those of the first at the command MARCH, and form a column which executes, with reference to the second line, a similar movement to that just described. The teams of the third line execute for that line what has been prescribed for the second, etc. If the teams are in line, in rear, or in front of the park, and the spaces between the carriages sufficient, they are marched towards the park in line, and the instructor commands: Teams, to your posts-MARCH. The teams, passing to the right of their respective carriages, take their positions in front of the poles. HITCHING THE TEAMS. 413. The instructor dismounts the drivers, and commands: HITCH. At this command, each driver goes in front of his horses, faces towards them, seizes with his right hand the reins of his near horse, and, with his left hand, the coupling rein of his off horse. The wheel driver then backs his horses so that they may be easily hitched, opens the branches of the pole yoke, fixes the toggles to the sliding rings, commencing with his off horse, and fastens the pole strap to the sliding loops of the breast straps, commencing with his near horse. He then goes in rear of his off horse, passing by the right, detaches his traces and hitches them to the splinter bar, commencing with the inner trace of the near horse and ending with the outer trace of the off horse. He then passes round the rear of the carriage at double quick, detaches the outer trace of the near horse, hitches it to the splinter bar, and resumes the position of STAND TO HORSE. The middle driver, as soon as the pole straps are secured, backs his horses, lashes the reins of the near horse to the coupling rein, in order to secure them, moves behind his off horse, passing by the right, detaches the traces, and when the off wheel horse is hitched, fastens them, commencing with the outer trace, and being careful to put the inner traces above the pole straps. He finishes 236 SCHOOL OF TIIE SECTION. by hitching the outer trace of the near horse, and resumes the position of STAND TO HORSE. The lead driver regulates himself by the middle driver, conforming to what has been prescribed for that driver. The instructor carefully examines whether the traces are equal and well stretched, and of the proper length; whether the leathers are on the flat side, and the breeching well placed, etc., and finally passing from one part to another, causes whatever is wrong to be corrected. 414. When the cannoneers are at their posts in time, they may be required to hitch instead of the drivers. When this is to be done the drivers are not dismounted. At the command Cannoneers, HITCH, Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 hitch the horses of the caissons, the gunner and Nos. 5, 6, and 7 those of the piece. Each hitches on his own side, Nos. 1, 2, 5, and the gunner attending to the wheel horses. With reduced numbers, the four highest, including the gunner, hitch the horses of the gun; the others hitch those of the caissons, commencing with the wheel horses, and each number on his own side. The command, Cannoneers, UNHITCH, is executed in a corresponding manner. TO UNPARK. 415. Everything being in proper order, the instructor commands: STAND TO HORSE. At this command, the drivers come to attention, the wheel driver runs to the end of the splinter bar, lifts it, raises and fastens the pole prop, and resumes his position; the instructor then mounts the drivers and commands: 1. By piece, from the right-front into column. 2. MARCH. (PLATE 23, Fig. 4.) At the first command, the drivers gather their horses. At the second command, the carriages of the right file move SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 23 straight to the front, and are followed by those of the file next on the left, the leading one of which, commencing to move when the hind wheels of the rear carriage of the right file are opposite its leaders, obliques to the right and takes its place in column in rear of that file; it is followed by the other carriages of its file, which march directly in its track. This movement is executed successively by the other files, the leading carriage of each increasing the obliquity of its march in proportion to its distance from the right flank. The carriages preserve in column the distance of 2 yards from each other. When the pieces are parked in one line, the movement is executed in the same way, each carriage moving when the hind wheels of the one on its right are opposite its leaders. Unparking from the left is executed according to the same principles and by inverse means. Before a carriage moves, the traces should be equally stretched, so that at the command MARCH, the horses may pull steadily and together. This precaution prevents those jerks which fatigue the horses and frequently break the harness. TO HALT. 416. When the carriages are accurately placed in column, the instructor commands: 1. Column. 2. HALT. At the first command, the drivers gather their horses without slackening the gait. At the command HALT, they halt according to the principles of No. 293. The wheel drivers must exert more strength in halting than the other drivers, as their horses have to act against the impulsive force of the carriage. When the carriages are halted, the traces must be stretched by carefully moving the horse a step or two forward. To resume the march, the instructor commands: 1. Column, forward. 2. MARCH. 238 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. TO WHEEL. 417. The instructor commands: 1. Pieces, left wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. (PLATES 25 and 23, Fig. 5.) At the first command the drivers gather their horses, at the second the teams wheel to the left, as in No. 398, and move directly to the front. The command HALT is given the moment the carriages are fully in the new direction. In the wheelings, and in the movements which depend on them, the lead driver enters the new direction without making his horses pull; the middle driver does the same; and it is not until the wheel driver is in the new direction that the traces are stretched. This principle is not rigorously applicable on difficult ground. Wheeling to the right is executed according to the same principles. TO OBLIQUE. 418. (PLATES 25 and 23, Fig. 6.) The pieces being in line, or in column, the instructor commands: 1. Pieces, left (or right) oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. Which are executed by each piece according to the principles prescribed for wheeling, observing that the oblique is a halfwheel. TO REVERSE. 419. Being in line, or in column, to establish the carriages in the opposite direction, the instructor commands: 1. Pieces, left (or right) reverse. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. (PLATE 23, Fig. 7.) At the command MARCH, the teams reverse as in No. 407, so as to turn the carriage on the shortest curve its construction will permit, and then moves to the front. 'Plate 23. Fi' l U'. 1 ".%.' Fi g.2.!t^ i A Tig.'.:~.'..-:, ",,- - ~ii~~~~ K> If SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 239 The command HALT will be given when the carriage is straight in the opposite direction. THE ABOUT. 420. To establish the carriages in the opposite direction and on the same ground, the instructor commands: 1. Pieces, left about. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. (PLATE 23, Fig. 8.) At the command MARCH, the drivers oblique the horses to the right; and the leading driver, after moving 7 yards in that direction, reins his horses to the left in such a manner that the extreme part of the curve they describe shall be 14 yards from their point of departure, and that, after passing 3 yards to the left of the original line of direction, they shall return to the ground on which the carriage first stood. The other drivers direct their horses so that the limber wheels shall describe a loop, which, extending 7 yards to the right and 11 to the front of the position occupied by the leaders before starting, shall pass a little to the left of the line of direction, and return in such a manner that the hind wheels, without crossing that direction, shall be brought to the position from which the leaders started. The command HALT is given as soon as the leading horses reach the ground on which the hind wheels stood at the commencement of the movement. In order that the preceding movement may be better understood, the instructor causes the carriages to execute it in succession. In each instance he precedes on foot the leading horses, and passes over the curve which they are to describe. 421. When it is desired to move forward, at the completion of the foregoing movements, instead of the command HALT, the instructor commands: FORWARD; and the pieces move direct to their front. 240 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. TO CHANGE DIRECTION IN COLUMN. 422. The instructor commands: Head of column, to the right (or left.) The leading assistant commands: 1. Right (or left) wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. (PLATE 23, Fig. 9.) The leading carriage executes the wheel, and at the command FORWARD, moves directly to the front. The other carriages wheel successively on the same ground, keeping their distances of 2 yards. THE ABOUT IN COLUMN. 423. The column being in march, or at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Pieces, left about. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. The drivers of each piece execute the about as prescribed in No. 420, and without halting move forward at the third command. The drivers of the last carriage, which is to become the head of the column, must be careful to execute the about without slackening the gait, in order not to delay the other carriages. This movement is performed at a walk, and the instructor, without requiring all the carriages to come about at the same time, must carefully observe and correct, if necessary, the means employed by the drivers for executing it. CHANGES OF GAIT. 424. The gaits are changed according to the principles of No. 318. The column being at a halt, is moved forward at a trot, by the command: 1. Column, forward-trot. 2. MARCH. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 241 Care should be taken that all the drivers start their horses off together. Marching at a trot, to halt, the instructor commands: Column-HALT. The drivers halt their horses quickly, but not suddenly; a carriage moving at a rapid rate cannot be halted at once, but must advance 5 or 6 yards after the command HALT is given. TO MARCH BY A FLANK. 425. The column being in march, or at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Column, by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide right (or left.) At the command MARCH, each piece wheels to the right, (or left;) and at the command FORWARD, moves to the front, dressing towards the guide, and preserving the intervals, which are 14 yards. TO HALT. 426. When in line, the instructor commands: Pieces-HALT. To resume the march, the commands are: 1. Pieces, forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right (or left.) 427. The pieces being in march, or at a halt, to resume the march in column, the instructor commands: 1. By the left (or right) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. Column, FORWARD. TO REST. 428. The instructor wheels the pieces into line, halts, and dismounts the drivers. Whenever the drivers are dismounted, and immediately on dismounting, the wheel driver lets down the pole prop, raising the splinter bar so as to enable the prop to rest 16 v 242 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. upon the ground, and support the pole. He then commands REST. The drivers remain near their horses. During the rest, the instructor sees that the drivers arrange every part of their harness which may have been displaced during the drill. He should occasionally question the drivers, to ascertain whether they understand the principles they have been applying. In executing the various movements when in march, the instructor will see that the drivers apply the principles prescribed for the same movements at a halt. 429. To resume the exercise, the instructor commands: ATTENTION! At this command all take their posts, and the wheel drivers raise and fasten the pole props. TO REIN BACK TO THE RIGHT. 430. The instructor commands: 1. Pieces, to the right and backward. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. At the first command, the drivers direct the poles to the right without advancing or backing the carriage. At the second, they rein the horses back as prescribed in No. 298, taking care to keep them to the right. At the command HALT, they place the team and carriage in line and halt, stretching the traces. Backing to the left is effected according to the same principles, and by inverse means. The instructor directs the drivers to make the off wheel horses back a little sooner than the others. Whenever carriages have to execute an about in a narrow space, as a street, for instance, this mode of backing is necessary. In this case the drivers, after obliquing to the right (or left) until within 4 yards of the wall, back to the right (or left) until the hind part of the carriage touches the wall, and then execute a reverse. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 243 TO DISMOUNT WHILST MARCHING. 431. The horses marching quietly, and the distance being well observed, the instructor commands: (such) driver-DIsMOUNT. The driver designated lets the reins slip on his horse's neck, and dismounts without abandoning his whip, observing to plant his right foot as far as possible in advance of the horse's shoulder; he quickly disengages his left foot from the stirrup, and moving opposite the near horse's head, seizes the left rein with his right hand. TO MOUNT WHILST MARCHING, 432. The instructor commands: (such) driver-MOUNT. The driver designated lets go the reins, faces to the right about, places his left hand on the head of the collar, seizes the stirrup with his right hand, and quickly inserts his left foot; he then rests his right hand on the cantle, raises his right leg, and, passing it over the croup, places himself lightly in the saddle. To avoid accident, the instructor first practices the men in executing these movements at a halt, not exacting that all shall dismount or mount at the same time. TO PARK. 433. The instructor directs the column towards the park, and gives, according to the position of the ground on which the pieces are to be parked, one of the following commands: 1. At-yards (Forward into park-right (or left) oblique. interval. To the right (or left) into park. On the right (or left) into park. 2. MARCH. To form forward into park. The column approaches the park from the rear, the leading piece being in rear of the ground on which it is to rest. At the command MARcIH, the leading piece marches direct to the front and halts, on the caution of the assistant instructor, at 244 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. its proper place; all the other carriages oblique to the right (or left) until near their places in park; when they change direction to the front so as to come up square on the line. They halt a little in rear of the line, and dress forward on the carriage already established. To form to the right into park. The instructor, approaching the park by its right, directs the column parallel to the front and 40 yards behind it. At the command MARCH, which is given when the leading piece is 3 yards from the point opposite the position which it is to occupy, the assistant instructor wheels it to the right, moves it forward, and halts it at its position. The other carriages move straight forward; each one wheels to the right when 3 yards from the point opposite to the position it is to occupy in park, marches forward, and places itself on the right of and in line with those already established. To form to the left into park is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. To form on the right into park. The instructor, approaching the park by its right, directs the column parallel to the front and 40 yards in rear. The leading piece is wheeled to the right and established in its position as before; the next, passing in rear of it, places itself in line on its left in like manner, and so with the others. When the park consists of two or more lines, the same principles are observed; each carriage of the rear ranks follows its file leader in its movements. The park should be formed on the left according to the same principles, and by inverse means. TO UNHITCH. 434. The park being formed, the instructor causes the drivers to dismount as prescribed, and commands: UtNHITCH. The lead driver goes in front of his horses, faces towards them, backs them in order to unhitch more easily, lashes the reins of the near horse to the coupling rein, then passing by the left of SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 245 his near horse, unhitches his traces, commencing with the outer one, bends them and fastens them by means of thetrussing straps. He unhitches the off horse in the same manner, commencing, however, with the inner trace, and, having finished, he passes to the rear of his horses, and resumes the position of stand to horse, first unlashing the reins. The middle driver unhitches, conforming to what has been prescribed for the lead driver. The wheel driver goes to the splinter bar, lets down the pole prop, unhitches, bends and fastens the traces of the near horse, and the inner trace of his off horse, passes at double quick around the carriage, unhitches and fastens the outer traces of the off horse; then goes in front of his horses, and, commencing with the near horse, unfastens the pole straps; detaches the toggles from the sliding rings, commencing with the off horse; unites the branches' of the pole yoke, and resumes the position of stand to horse. TO LEAVE THE PARK. 435. The instructor mounts the drivers, and commands: 1. By team, from the right (or left)-front into column. 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, the right (or left) team moves to the front until it is disengaged from the pole, and then changes its direction at the command of the instructor. If the carriages are in two or more ranks, the teams of the same file follow each other, if the intervals between the carriages are sufficient for their passage. They are followed by the other teams or files of teams, which enter the column so as to leave the proper distances between the pairs. If there are not sufficient intervals between the carriages for the passage of the teams, the instructor commands: 1. Teams, by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. Each team wheels as directed, and moves forward. As the 2 246 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. heads of the column pass out of the park, the teams of the rear rank oblique to the left or right, and take their proper places in column, in rear (or front) of the teams of the front carriages of their files. The teams are then marched to the stables, or pickets, by the means already prescribed. NOTE.-The method of instruction prescribed in the riding-house drill may be used with advantage in the elementary instruction of the driver, the team, and the piece. For this purpose a proper drill ground should be laid out, and the prescribed movements executed, so far as practicable, in the manner directed for the cannoneer mounted. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 247 ARTICLE FOURTH. THE SECTION. 436. IN the battery of manceuvre, the section is composed of two pieces and two caissons, horsed and prepared for service. The piece and its caisson are kept in a fixed relation to each other, and may be said to constitute a unit; the word piece beingoften used to designate the piece and its caisson taken together. They are separated only in the formations in battery, and this simplifies the manceuvres greatly, rendering it generally unnecessary to give separate commands to the caissons. In the manceuvres, it is immaterial which carriage leads. All the movements should be executed with the caissons in front, after they have been executed with the pieces leading, in order that the drivers may become familiar with their duties under all circumstances. 437. When the pieces are in column, each being followed or preceded by its caisson, the section is said to be formed in column of pieces. The distances between the carriages, or between the carriages and detachments in horse artillery, are 2 yards. 438. (PLATE 28.) In the order in line, the carriages are formed in two lines, fronting in the same direction, the pieces limbered, and each followed or preceded by its caisson. The intervals between the carriages are 14 yards, the distances 2 yards. In horse artillery the intervals are 17 yards, the distances between the carriages, or between the carriages and detachments, 2 yards. When all the carriages are drawn by four horses, the intervals are diminished 3 yards; when they are drawn by eight horses, the 248 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. intervals are increased 3 yards, the distances being the same in each case. Should a portion of the teams be reduced a pair of horses or more, allowance must be made for the deficient horses by increasing the distances of those carriages accordingly, estimating the length of a pair of horses in harness at 3 yards. In both kinds of artillery these arrangements are the same, whether the pieces or caissons lead. 439. (PLATE 29.) In the order in battery, the pieces are unlimbered and prepared for firing. The pieces, limbers, and caissons are turned towards the enemy, each piece having its limber and caisson behind it. The intervals in both mounted and horse artillery are the same as in line. The distances in battery are the same for both kinds of artillery. Between the piece and limber it is 6 yards, measuring from the end of the handspike to the heads of the lead horses; between the limber and caisson it is 11 yards, measuring from the rear of the limber to the heads of the lead horses of the caisson. The cannoneers are at their posts, (No. 95,) and, in horse artillery, the detachment of horses is 4 yards in rear of the limber, and held by the horse holders. The pieces, whether in line or in battery, are designated according to their actual position in the section, as the right piece and left piece. POSTS OF OFFICERS AND NON-COMMISSIONED OFFICERS. 440. The chief of the section is ordinarily the instructor. His position is, in line, midway between his leading carriages and on a line with their lead drivers; but he moves to any point at which his presence may be required, or from which he can best superintend the movements. In battery, his position is in the centre of his section and half-way between the lines of his pieces and limbers. When the captain is instructor the chief of the section acts as assistant, and repeats the commands. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 249 The chiefs of pieces act as guides, and direct the movements of the carriages. Their positions, both in line and in column of pieces, are on the left of and near the lead drivers of their leading carriages. They wear the sabre sheathed, unless it is ordered to be drawn, and mount and dismount at the commands given for the drivers. In horse artillery they are also guides, except when the caissons lead, in which case the chiefs of caissons are guides. In battery each chief of piece is ordinarily outside the file, on the left of his piece, but near it, and opposite the middle of the trail handspike. During the real execution of the firings, he dismounts and gives the reins of his horse to the driver of the wheel horses of the limber. In horse artillery the chief of caisson also dismounts and gives the reins of his horse to the wheel driver of the caisson. 441. Alignments are made on the drivers of the wheel horses, except in battery, when they are made on the wheels of the pieces. 442. The section is taken at the park, the teams hitched, the chiefs of pieces and drivers dismounted; the detachments formed either in front or rear of their pieces; the cannoneers equipped for the service of the guns. The chief of section superintends the preparation of his section, and sees that the duties are correctly performed. In mounted batteries the cannoneers wear the sabre belts only, the sabres being carried on the ammunition chests. The drivers, and, in horse artillery, the cannoneers also, wear their sabres, unless special directions are given to the contrary. 443. The instructor explains the meaning of the terms interval, distance, etc., and such other terms as may be used in the course of instruction. He also explains the objects of the different movements before executing them. During the rests he questions the men, and especially the non-commissioned officers, to see that they understand the movements and the principles which govern their execution. 250 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS. 444. During the manceuvres the cannoneers are either at their posts as in No. 95, or they are seated on the ammunition chests as follows:-the gunner, and Nos. 5 and 6, on the limber chest of the piece, the gunner on the right, and No. 5 on the left; Nos. 1, 2, and 7 on the limber chest of the caisson, No. 2 on the right and No. 1 on the left; Nos. 3, 4, and 8 on the middle chest of the caisson, No. 4 on the right, and No. 3 on the left. When circumstances require it, Nos. 6 and 7 may be directed to mount the rear chest of the caisson. They sit with their backs to the front, No. 6 on the right. In horse artillery, the cannoneers are in detachments of two ranks, and habitually in rear of their pieces. The detachments may be ordered to the right or left for greater convenience in making a rapid movement, or for coming into battery to the rear when the caissons are in front. But, as their positions on the flanks are inconvenient for manceuvre, they should be ordered to the rear as soon as the special object has been accomplished. Their proper places in rear should be always kept open for that purpose. TO MOUNT AND DISMOUNT THE CANNONEERS. 445. To mount. The instructor halts the carriages if not already at a halt, and commands: 1. Cannoneers, prepare to mount. 2. MOUNT. At the first command, the cannoneers run to their respective places, and stand facing the chests which they are to mount, the gunner and No. 5 in rear of the gun limber; No. 6 on the right of the gunner; Nos. I and 2 in rear of the caisson limber; No. 7 on the left of No. 1; Nos. 3 and 4 in front of the middle chest of the caisson; No. 8 on the right of No. 3. The gunner, and Nos. 2 and 3, seize the handles with the right hand, and step upon the stocks with the left foot, and Nos. 5, 1, and 4, seize the SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 251 handles with the left hand, and step upon the stocks with the right foot. At the command MOUNT, the gunner, and Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, spring into their seats. The gunner, and Nos. 5, 1, and 2, seat themselves in their places with their backs to the front, and immediately face about by throwing their legs outward over the handles. No. 8 then springs into his seat in the same manner as No. 3; Nos. 6 and 7 step in rear of their chests, place their hands upon them, step upon the stocks with their nearest feet, spring up, step over the boxes and take their seats, placing their hands on the shoulders of the men already seated in order to steady themselves. When the command Cannoneers, MOUNT, is given by itself, the men run to their places and spring into their seats at once, No. 8 taking his seat before No. 3. 446. To dismount. The instructor halts the carriages as before, and commands: 1. Cannoneers, prepare to dismount. 2. DISMOUNT. At the first command, the cannoneers stand up in their places, except the gunner and No. 5, who face about. At the second command, the whole jump off and run to their posts. When the command Cannoneers, DISMOUNT, is given by itself, the men jump from their chests in the same manner. 44T. The cannoneers always dismount at the command ACTION FRONT, RIGHT or LEFT. They also dismount at the command IN BATTERY, as soon as the carriage on which they are mounted, halts. In horse artillery, the gunner dismounts the cannoneers when the command ACTION FRONT, RIGHT or LEFT, or IN BATTERY is given, and all move to their posts in double quick, and unlimber as rapidly as possible. The object of mounting the cannoneers on the ammunition chests is generally to enable the battery to make quick movements. Care should be taken when the ground is unfavorable, or the movements are likely to be prolonged, not to mount them so often 252 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. as to be injurious to the horses. After they are well instructed in mounting and dismounting at a halt, the cannoneers may be ordered to mount and dismount whilst the carriages are in march at a walk. 448. When a caisson is absent, or temporarily disabled, and a quick movement is necessary, Nos. 1, 2, and 3 will mount the off horses of the piece, No. 2 the lead, No. I the middle, and No. 3 the wheel horse; Nos. I and 3 passing by the rear of the gun. This arrangement may also be resorted to in case of a sudden alarm, the drivers of the caissons assisting the drivers of the pieces by harnessing their off horses and hitching them in. The cannoneers then mount as directed, and the pieces move off. The remaining cannoneers assist the drivers of the caissons to harness and hitch in their horses, and then mount the chests of the caissons, which proceed at once to join their pieces. TO UNPARK. 449. As soon as the teams are hitched, the cannoneers equipped, and the detachments posted, a minute inspection is made by the chiefs of pieces, who report to the chief of the section. Everything being prepared, the instructor commands: 1. By piece from the right, (or left,) front into column. 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, the piece designated marches directly to the front, followed by its caisson at a distance of 2 yards, measured from the rear of the leading carriage to the heads of the horses. The other piece and its caisson oblique so as to enter the column, and follow the movements of the leading piece, each so regulating its march by that of the carriage which precedes it as to move in the same direction at 2 yards distance. In horse artillery, the same distance is taken between the detachments and the carriages which precede and follow them. TO FORM THE SECTION. 450. The column of pieces being at a halt, or marching at a SCIOOL OF THE SECTION. 253 walk, to form the section, gaining ground to the left, the instructor commands * 1. Form section, left oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. (PLATE 30.) At the command MARCH, the first two carriages, piece and caisson, advance 5 yards and halt. The two rear carriages oblique to the left, gain their intervals of 14 yards, then move forward, and place themselves abreast and on a line with the other two, dressing to the right. The instructor, or the chief of the section if the captain is the instructor, takes his place midway between the leading carriages, and on a line with the lead drivers. When the column of pieces is marching at a trot, the formation is executed according to the same principles and by the same commands; but the leading carriages, instead of advancing 5 yards and halting as before, pass to a walk as soon as the command MARCH is given. The other carriages oblique at a trot, and, when abreast the leading ones, pass to a walk, dressing to the right. When the column of pieces is marching at a walk, to form the section at a trot, the commands are: 1. Form section, left oblique-trot. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. At the command MARCH, the two leading carriages continue to march in the original direction at a walk. The two following oblique to the left, gain their intervals at a trot, and resume the walk when opposite the leading carriages. The section is formed, gaining ground to the right according to the same principles. The commands are: Form section, right oblique; or, Form section, right oblique-trot; MARCH; Guide left. TO MARCH AND TO HALT 451. The section being formed, and at a halt, to put it in motion, the instructor commands: 1. Section, forward, or Section, forward-trot. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide left (or right.) w 254 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. At the command MARCH, all the carriages advance; the guide maintains the direction; and the carriages, and also the detachments in horse artillery, preserve their intervals and distances. To halt, the instructor commands: Section-HALT. The carriages are all halted, keeping dressed, and not stopping too suddenly. CHANGES OF GAIT. 452. The changes of gait in column of pieces or in line, are executed at the command of the instructor as in No. 424. When the rapid gaits are to be maintained for any considerable period of time, the instructor will cause the cannoneers to mount the ammunition chests before increasing the gaits. As a general rule, the cannoneers should mount the ammunition chests'only for rapid movements; and when within range of the enemy's guns they should dismount, unless important considerations require a continuation of the rapid gaits. The explosion of a caisson might destroy many of the men seated on the chest. TO CHANGE DIRECTION. 453. The section being in march or at a halt, to change direction to the left, the instructor commands: 1. Section, left wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. (PLATE 35.) At the command MARCH, the pivot carriage executes the wheel without changing the gait, the carriage on the wheeling flank wheels in such manner as to conform to its movements, increasing the gait, and preserving the intervals. At the command FORWARD, which is given as soon as it is in the new direction, the pivot carriage moves direct to the front; the other resumes its original gait after completing the wheel and arriving upon the same line. The carriages of the rear rank preserve their distances, and follow those of the front rank. The instructor gives the first command in time to command SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 255 MARCH, when the heads of the leaders of the leading carriages are 3 25 yards from the wheeling point. The command FORWARD, must be given as soon as the leading pivot carriage has executed the wheel. To halt the section, when its wheel is completed, the command 4. Section- ALT is given as soon as the rear carriage is square in the new direction. The change of direction to the right is executed according to the same principles. An oblique change of direction is executed by the section, according to the same principles, at the commands: 1. Left (or right) half-wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. The command FORWARD being given as the leading pivot carriage is about finishing the left (or right) oblique. TO MARCH BY A FLANK. 454. The section being in march, or at a halt, to gain ground to the left, the instructor commands: 1. Section, by the left flank. 2. MARCH. (PLATE 31.) At the command MARCH, each piece and caisson wheels at once to the left. When the wheel is nearly completed, the instructor commands: 1. FORWARD. 2. Guide right. At the command FORWARD, all the carriages move directly to the front. The instructor, or chief of section, takes his place between the leading carriages, which keep in line, regulating on the guide, and keeping their intervals of 14 yards. The rear carriages keep their proper distances of 2 yards. To resume the original direction, the instructor commands: 1. Section, by the right flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide right or left; 25D SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. which commands are executed according to the same principles, each carriage wheeling to the right, and the chief of section taking his place between the two leading ones. Whilst marching to a flank the section may be marched in a direction opposite to the original one, the commands being: 1. Section by the left flank. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide left (or right.) The flank march to gain ground to the right is executed according to the same principles. (PLATE 32.) In horse artillery the carriages are aligned on each other as in foot artillery, the distances being 5 yards. The intervals will be 14 or 21 yards, and depend on the relative position of the pieces and caissons, being greatest when the pieces lead. The detachments wheel in the same direction as the pieces, and place themselves at their sides 2 yards from the wheels, the heads of the horses of the front rank being on a line with the axletrees of the limbers. In marching by the left flank they are on the left, and in marching by the right flank they are on the right of their pieces. In resuming the original direction, the detachments wheel in the same direction as their pieces, and place themselves at once in rear of them; but in marching in the opposite direction they resume their places by allowing the pieces to pass them, and then taking post in their rear. THE OBLIQUE. 455. The section being in march, or at a halt, to cause it to gain ground to the left and front, the instructor commands: 1. Section, left oblique. 2. MARCH. (PLATE 33.) At the command MARCH, all the carriages oblique at once to the left, as prescribed in No. 418, and march in the new direction, moving in parallel lines, and preserving their intervals. In obliquing, the heads of the horses in each rank are on a line parallel to the original front. The interval is 14 yards, measured parallel to the front, and 10 yards if measured on a line perpen SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 257 dicular to the oblique direction. In mounted batteries, each carriage of the right file marches in the prolongation of the left carriage of the rank which precedes its own, and at a distance of 9 yards. The chief of section conforms his movements to those of the section, and preserves his relative position. To resume the original direction, the instructor commands: FORWARD, And the carriages resume the original direction and guides. To halt the section, during the oblique, the instructor commands: Section-HALT. To resume the march, in the oblique direction, he commands: Section-MARCH. (PLATE 34.) In horse artillery, the carriages oblique according to the same principles. They also form ranks whose fronts are parallel to the original front of the section. The detachments follow in rear of their pieces. The right oblique is executed according to the same principles. THE REVERSE. 456. The section being in line, or in column of pieces, in march, or at a halt, to form it faced in the opposite direction, the instructor commands: 1. Pieces and caissons, left (or right) reverse. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. Each carriage executes the reverse as in No. 419. THE ABOUT. 457. The section being in line, or in column of pieces, in march, or at a halt, to form it faced in the opposite direction, each carriage upon the same ground, the instructor commands: 1. Pieces and caissons, left about. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. Each carriage executes the about as in No. 420. 17 w2 258 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. (PLATE 26.) In the reverse, and the about, in horse artillery, the detachment of cannoneers follows the piece, which advances 7 yards after finishing the movement in order that the heads of the lead horses may reach the position occupied by the rear of the detachment at the commencement of the movement. THE COUNTERMARCH. 458. The section being in line, or in column of pieces, in march, or at a halt, to form it faced in the opposite direction, on the same ground, and with the same carriages in front, the instructor commands: 1. Countermarch. 2. MARCH. 3. HALT. (PLATE 26.) At the command MARCH, the leading carriage of each piece executes the about, and moves at once to the position occupied by the rear carriage at the commencement of the movement. The latter follows the track of the former, executes the about on the same ground, and takes its place. When the heads of the lead horses of the leading carriage arrive at the position occupied by the hind part of the rear carriage at the beginning of the movement, the instructor commands: HALT, or Column, HALT. In horse artillery, when the piece is in rear, the caisson, after executing the about, moves forward, and is halted when its lead horses are upon the ground occupied by the horses of the rear rank of the detachment at the commencement of the movement. 459. In the reverse, the about, and the countermarch, the chief of the section, and the chiefs of pieces, take their places in line or column according to the changed position of the section. When the instructor wishes to move forward at the completion of these movements, instead of the command HALT, he commands FORWARD, Guide right, or Column, FORWARD, according to the formation of the section. These movements may be executed at the trot; but care must be taken that the space occupied in coming about be sufficient, and the gait so moderated as to avoid the danger of upsetting SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 259 the carriages, especially when the cannoneers are on the chests, at which time they are most liable to that accident. PASSAGE OF CARRIAGES. 460. The section marching at a walk, in line, or in column of pieces, to change the relative positions of the front and rear carriages of the pieces without altering the gait, the instructor commands: 1. Pieces, pass your caissons, (or Caissons, pass your pieces.) 2. MARCH. (PLATE 25.) At the command MARCH, the leading carriage of each piece halts. The rear carriage inclines to the right, passes it, takes the proper distance in front by inclining to the left, and halts. The chief of the piece joins it as it passes. To continue the march without halting the carriages which have passed, the instructor commands FORWARD, when the passage is nearly completed. When the section is marching at a trot, the passage is executed at the same commands and according to the same principles, except that the leading carriages, instead of halting at the command MARCH, move at a walk. The rear carriages execute the passage at a trot, and then change the gait to a walk. When the section is at a halt, the passage is executed according to the same principles and by the same commands. If at the conclusion of the passage, the instructor wishes to put the section in march, he commands FORWARD as the passage is about being completed. When the section is in line, the command FORWARD will be followed by the command for the guide. The section marching at a walk, to execute the passage at a trot, the instructor commands: 1. Pieces, pass your caissons-trot; (or Caissons, pass your pieces-trot.) 2. MARCH. At the command MARCI, the leading carriages continue the 260 -SCHOOL OF TIIE SECTION. march at a walk. The others execute the passage at a trot, and resume the walk as soon as the passage is completed. Care must be taken that the carriages passed to the front move in all cases sufficiently in advance before inclining to the left, to avoid injuring the lead horses of the carriages they pass. TO BREAK THE SECTION. 461. The section marching at a walk, in line, to form column of pieces from the right, at that gait, the instructor commands: 1. By the right-break section. 2. MARCH. (PLATE 30.) At the command MARCH, the two right carriages, piece, and caisson continue to march at a walk; the others halt. The left carriages remain halted until the leaders of the leading carriage are passed by the wheel horses of the rear carriage on the right. They then oblique to the right, take their places in column, and follow the two leading carriages. When the section is marching at a trot, the column of pieces is formed according to the same principles and by the same commands. But in this case the carriages which halted before slacken the gait to a walk, and resume the trot to oblique and enter the column. When the section is at a halt, the movement is executed as prescribed for the march at a walk, the two right carriages moving forward at a walk at the command MARCH. The section marching at a walk, to form column of pieces from the right at a trot, the instructor commands: 1. By the right, break section-trot. 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, the right carriages move forward at a moderate trot. The left carriages commence the trot on obliquing to enter the column. When the section is at a halt it is broken at a trot by the same commands and in the same manner. The designated carriages move off at a trot, the other carriages moving forward at a walk SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 261 when the command MARCH is given. This rule for commencing a movement at a trot is general. The section is broken from the left according to the same principles. TO FORM THE CAISSONS ON THE FLANK. 462. The section being in column of pieces with the caissons in rear, to form the pieces and caissons in separate columns, as in the flank march of the section, the instructor commands: 1. Caissons, left; (or Caissons, left-trot.) 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. At the command MARCH, the caissons oblique at once to the left, gain the intervals of 14 yards, and place themselves opposite their pieces, closing upon each other at the same time to the usual distances. The gait is regulated as in the formation of sections, and when the movement is performed at a walk, the leading carriage halts after advancing its own length. The instructor or chief of section takes his place as in the section in line between the two leading carriages. The caissons are formed on the right according to the same principles. When the pieces are in rear, they are formed on the right or left of their caissons in the same manner and by corresponding commands. TO REPLACE THE CAISSONS IN REAR. 463. The section being formed with the caissons on the flank, to replace them in rear of their pieces, the instructor commands: 1. Caissons, rear; (or Caissons, rear-trot.) 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, the piece at the head of the column moves forward at the required gait, and its caisson places itself in rear by an oblique. The other pieces move forward in succession, and are followed by their caissons in like manner. All the carriages preserve the usual distances in column. 262 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. This movement is performed at the different gaits and according to the principles prescribed for breaking sections. To place the caissons in front of their pieces, the commands are: 1. Caissons, front; (or Caissons, front-trot.) 2. MARCH. The caissons oblique successively and take their positions at 2 yards distance in front of their pieces, which then follow their movements. TO FORM THE PARK. 464. The section being in column of pieces, and near the ground on which it is to be parked, will be formed by the commands and according to the principles of No. 433. The chiefs of pieces direct the march of their carriages. When the nature of the ground requires it, the detachments are ordered to leave the pieces when they are about entering the park, and to form on ground designated for the purpose. The detachments and teams are marched from the park by the means already prescribed. FORMATIONS IN BATTERY. IN LINE, WITH PIECES IN FRONT TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE FRONT. 465. The section being at a halt, in line, with pieces in front, to form in battery to the front, the instructor commands: 1. IN BATTERY. Guide left. 2. MARCH. (PLATE 52.) At the command IN BATTERY, the caissons stand fast, and the pieces advance. The intervals and alignment are preserved, and the chiefs of pieces and of the section march at their places in line. At the command MARCH, which is given as soon as they have advanced 17 yards, the chiefs of pieces and of the section halt, and the pieces execute an about. As soon as the about is com SCHOOL OF TIE SECTION. 263 pleted, the pieces are halted, unlimbered, and prepared for firing, the limbers being taken to their places in battery by an about. When the pieces come about, the one already designated as such continues to be the guide, and the alignment is made on it. When the cannoneers are marching by the sides of their pieces, they halt at the command MARCH, allow their pieces to pass them, change sides, and move forward to the posts they are to occupy when their pieces have completed the about. They are not required to observe any particular order during this movement. When the cannoneers are mounted on the ammunition chests, those on the caissons dismount and run to their posts at the command IN BATTERY. Those on the pieces dismount after the about. The chiefs of pieces, and of the section, take their posts in battery as soon as that formation is completed. This rule is general. In horse artillery, the movement is executed in the same manner, and by the same commands. But the pieces advance only 10 yards before executing the about. The horses of the detachments do not advance; but at the command IN BATTERY, the cannoneers dismount and run to their posts. When the section is marching in line with the pieces in front, it is formed in battery to the front according to the same principles and by the commands: 1. IN BATTERY. 2. MARCH. At the command IN BATTERY, the caissons halt, and in horse artillery the detachments do the same, the cannoneers dismounting and running to their posts. In dismounting or mounting, the cannoneers in horse artillery separate to the right and left of the horse holders, giving the reins to or receiving the reins from them. The horse holders hold the reins of the horses on their right in the right hand; and the reins of those on the left in the left hand. 264 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE FRONT BY THROWING THE CAISSONS TO THE REAR. 466. The section being in line at a halt, with the pieces or caissons in front, the instructor commands: ACTION FRONT. At this command, the pieces are unlimbered and wheeled about by hand. The limbers and caissons, reversing to the left at the same time, move to the rear and take their places in battery at their proper distances by another reverse. When the cannoneers are mounted on the ammunition chests, they dismount as soon as the command ACTION FRONT is given, and run to their posts. In horse artillery, the detachments move to the positions of their horses in battery, and dismount at the command of the gunner, unless the number of horses is so small that the horse holders may lead them. In this case the instructor commands Cannoneers, DISMOUNT, immediately after the command ACTION FRONT is given. IN LINE, WITH CAISSONS IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE FRONT. 467. The section being at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Pieces, pass your caissons. MARCH. 2. IN BATTERY. Guide left. 3. MARCH. (PLATE 52.) The pieces pass their caissons, and at the command IN BATTERY, given as soon as the passage is effected, the formation is executed as in No. 465. In horse artillery, the command IN BATTERY is given when the detachments have passed the caissons. When the section is marching, the formation is executed according to the same principles, and by the commands Pieces, pass your caissons, (or Pieces, pass your caissons-trot;)-MARcH. IN BATTERY-Guide left-MARCH. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 265 IN LINE, WITH PIECES IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE REAR. 468. The section being at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Fire to the rear. 2. Caissons pass your pieces-trot-MARCH. 3. IN BATTERY. (PLATE 53.) At the command MARCH, the caissons oblique to the right; pass their pieces at a brisk trot; advance 1 yards beyond them, execute a reverse together, and take their places in battery. As soon as they have passed, the instructor commands IN BATTERY; the pieces are unlimbered and prepared for firing. When the cannoneers are mounted on the chests, the caissons halt before executing the reverse, to allow them to dismount and run to their posts. When the section is at a halt, as in the present case, it is considered better to dismount the cannoneers before commencing the movement. In horse artillery, at the command IN BATTERY, the detachments incline to the right, pass their pieces at a brisk trot, and take their places in battery by a left reverse. The cannoneers then dismount, run to their posts, unlimber, and prepare for firing. When the section is in march, the formation is executed according to the same principles, and by the same commands. At the command IN BATTERY, given as soon as the caissons have passed, the pieces halt, and the movement is completed as already directed. IN LINE, WITH CAISSONS IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE REAR. 469. The section being at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Fire to the rear. 2. IN BATTERY. (PLATE 53.) At the command IN BATTERY, the pieces are unlimbered and prepared for firing. The caissons move at a brisk trot, and take their places in battery by a left about. x 266 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. In horse artillery, at the command IN BATTERY, the detachments pass their pieces at a trot, move to their places in battery as prescribed in No. 468, dismount, and run to their posts. When the section is in march, the formation is executed according to the same principles and by the same commands. IN BATTERY, TO FORM IN LINE TO THE FRONT. 470. Being in battery, to form line to the front with the caissons in rear, the instructor commands: LIMBER TO THE FRONT. At this command, the pieces are limbered as directed in No. 115, the caissons closing, without further command, to the proper distances. If the instructor wishes to place the caissons in front, he commands LIMBER TO THE FRONT; and while the pieces are limbering, Caissons, pass your pieces-trot-MARCH. The caissons pass, and halt in front of their pieces, unless the instructor wishes the section to advance, in which case he commands F6RWARD-Guide right (or left,) as the caissons are completing the passage, and the section moves forward at a walk. In horse artillery, the horse holders close to 2 yards from their pieces, and there the cannoneers mount. When the pieces cannot be wheeled about by hand, the instructor commands LIMBER TO THE REAR; and when this is executed, if he wishes to retain the pieces in front, he commands: 1. Pieces, left about; caissons, forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Section-HALT. (PLATE 54.) At the command LIMBER TO THE REAR, the pieces are limbered as prescribed in No. 117. At the first and second commands, the pieces execute the about; the caissons closing to the distances of 2 yards. At the third command, given when the about is completed, the pieces halt and place themselves squarely on the line. If the instructor wishes the section to advance immediately, SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 267 instead of the command Section, HALT, he commands, FORWARD, Guide right (or left,) and the caissons close on the march. If the instructor wishes to place the caissons in front, he may cause the piece to be limbered to the rear, as before, and command: 1. Caissons, pass your pieces-trot-pieces left about. 2. MARCH. 3. Section, HALT. Or, 3. FORWARD; Guide right (or left.) (PLATE 54.) The pieces execute the about at once, the caissons move straight to the front, and so pass the pieces during the execution of the about. The section halts or advances as soon as the passage is completed. 471. In horse artillery, the horse holders, immediately on the command LIMBER TO THE REAR being given, lead the horses of the detachment, at a trot, to their positions in rear of the guns, where the cannoneers mount. This rule is general, with the exception prescribed in No. 473. If the horses are too numerous or not sufficiently tractable for this, the instructor commands Cannoneers, MOUNT, immediately after giving the command LIMBER TO THE REAR. The cannoneers, as soon as the piece is limbered, run to their horses, mount, and the detachment moves to the rear of the piece at a trot. IN BATTERY, TO FORM LINE TO THE REAR. 472. The instructor causes the pieces to be limbered to the rear; and then if he wishes to place the caissons in front, commands: 1. Caissons, left about-pieces forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Section, HALT, or FORWARD; Guide right (or left.) (PLATE 55.) The caissons execute the about, and the pieces close to their proper distances. The third command is given as the about is completed. If the instructor wishes to place the pieces in front, he causes them to be limbered to the rear, and commands: 2 C8 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 1 Pieces, pass your caissons-caissons, left about. 2. MARCH. 3. Section, HALT. Or, FORWARD-Guide right (or left.) (PLATE 55.) At the command MARCH, the pieces pass their caissons by moving direct to the front, the caissons executing the about at the same command, and so regulating the gait as to take their proper distances. In forming line to the rear, either with pieces or caissons in front, the caissons may be placed at once in position, for greater convenience in mounting the cannoneers. For this purpose, if the caissons are to be in front, the instructor, immediately upon commanding LIMBER TO THE REAR, adds: 1. Caissons, in front of your pieces. Or, caissons, in front of your pieces-trot. 2. MARCH. While the pieces are limbering, the caissons oblique to the right, move forward near the middle of the interval between the leaders of the pieces, place themselves in front of them by two successive wheels to the left, and halt. If the pieces are to be in front, the commands are: 1. Caissons, in rear of your pieces. Or, caissons, in rear of your pieces-trot. 2. MARCH. The caissons incline to the right, pass their pieces; move sufficiently to the rear, and then by a left reverse take their positions in rear of their pieces. TO MARCH BY A FLANK. 473. The section being in battery, to gain ground to the left for the purpose of forming again in battery, the instructor causes the pieces to be limbered to the rear, and commands: 1. Pieces right-caissons left wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide right. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 269 (PLATES 66 and 67.) At the command MARCH, the carriages wheel as ordered, and at the third and fourth commands move forward with an interval of 8 yards, and a distance of 2 yards. In horse artillery the interval is also 8 yards, but the distance is 5 yards. For this movement, the instructor, before giving the command LIMBER TO THE REAR, warns the horse holders to stand fast. As the pieces wheel, the detachments also wheel, so as to march at the sides of their pieces as prescribed in No. 454. The movement to gain ground to the left may be executed by limbering at once to the left; the caissons wheeling to the left whilst the pieces are limbering, and the instructor afterwards commanding FORWARD-MARCH-Guide right. In horse artillery, the horse holders move to the left of their pieces when limbering to the left. As soon as the section has reached the position on the left which it is intended to occupy, the instructor commands: 1. By the left fiank —MARCH. 2. Fire to the rear-IN BATTERY. The command IN BATTERY is given as soon as the pieces have completed the wheel. In horse artillery, the detachments follow the movements of the caissons, and take their places in battery. The movement to gain ground to the right is executed according to the same principles. If it is desired to form the pieces in battery on the same line, gaining ground to a flank, the section may be limbered to the front, marched by the flank to the position to be occupied, and be formed in battery as already directed. The same movement may be executed by limbering to the right or left, gaining ground to the flank, halting, and commanding: ACTION LEFT, or ACTION RIGHT, which will be executed as directed in No. 12S; the caissons wheeling to the right or left, and taking their places in battery by reversing. x 2 270 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. In horse artillery, the detachments wheel to the right or left and take their places in battery. 474. In all cases when the section is formed with the caissons on the right, or on the left of their pieces, it may be formed into battery to the right, or to the left, by the command: ACTION RIGHT, or ACTION LEFT. When the pieces are placed in battery by the command ACTION RIGHT, the limbers and caissons always take their places in battery by wheeling to the left, gaining their distances to the rear, and then reversing to the left. If the command is ACTION LEFT, they wheel and reverse to the right. 475. In all cases when the word ACTION enters into the command for forming in battery, the limbers and caissons take their positions by wheeling and reversing, and never by executing an about. MOVEMENTS WITH THE PROLONGE. 476. The section being in battery, to fix prolonges to fire retiring, the instructor commands: FIX PROLONGE TO FIRE RETIRING. At this command, the limber inclines to the right, wheels to the left about, and halts 4 yards from the trail. No. 5 uncoils the prolonge and passes the toggle to the gunner, who fixes it in the trail by passing it upwards through the lunette, whilst he attaches the other end to the limber by passing the ring over the pintle and keying it. At the command RETIRE, the cannoneers face about and all march on the left of the piece, except Nos. 1 and 3. They keep the implements in their hands, and, at the command HALT, face about, resume their posts, and go on with the firing. Should the piece be loaded at the command RETIRE, No. 3 puts in the priming wire. At the command HALT, he takes it out again, and No. 1 rams home. If the command LOAD be given, when the piece is in motion, No. 5 puts in the charge, and No 2 serves SCIOOL OF THE SECTION. 271 vent, receiving from No. 3 the necessary implements for that purpose. The piece being in action, to fix the prolonge to fire advancing, the instructor commands: FIx PROLONGE TO FIRE ADVANCING. At this command, the limber passes its piece on the right and halts when in front of it, Nos. 1 and 3 stepping within the wheels to avoid the limber. No. 5 uncoils the prolonge, carries it to the front, gives the toggle to No. 2, who puts it in the lunette of the axle-strap, whilst he places the ring over the pintle and keys it. In advancing the men retain their implements and march at their posts. At the command HALT, No. 2 takes out the toggle and commands: DRIVE ON, upon which the limber takes its place in rear, and the firing is renewed. When the piece is limbered, to fix the prolonge to fire retiring or advancing, the same commands are given. The piece is unlimbered, and the prolonge attached as before. To fix the prolonge for passing a ditch or for any other purpose than those mentioned in Nos. 476 and 477, the command is: FIX PROLONGE. The prolonge is then fixed to the trail as before. In moving with the prolonge, the gunner attends the handspike, and, in changes of direction, is careful to circle the trail round in proper time to prevent the prolonge from being cut by the wheels. No. 7 clears the prolonge from the limber wheels, and Nos. 1 and 2 from the gun wheels. In wheeling about, the limber first backs a little, and then describes a small circle. In passing a ditch the gunner takes out the handspike. In fixing the prolonge for any purpose, the caisson wheels or reverses, if necessary, so that the horses of the limber and caisson may face in the same direction. To detach the prolonge from the limber and coil it up, the instructor commands: COIL PROLONGE. At this command the gunner takes out the toggle, and No. 5 27 2 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. takes off the ring and coils the prolonge, first passing the ring over the upper prolonge hook. To coil the prolonge and limber to the rear, the instructor oommands: COIL PROLONGE; —LIMBER TO THE REAR. The prolonge is detached and coiled as before, the piece is run towards the limber, which reins back on receiving the command REIN BACK from the gunner, and is limbered up. To limber to the front, right or left, the instructor commands: COIL PROLONGE;LIMBER TO THE FRONT, RIGHT, or LEFT; which is executed as already described, the gunner commanding, DRIVE ON, as soon as the prolonge is detached. FIRINGS. 477. When everything is prepared for firing, the instructor commands: COMMENCE FIRING. This command, when given by itself, or after the command LOAD, is repeated by the chiefs of pieces, and the firing immediately commenced. When the section is formed for action, the pieces are not loaded until the command LOAD, or COMMENCE FIRING, is given by its chief. When the command LOAD is given, the pieces are loaded; but the firing does not commence until ordered. After the loading is completed, if the firing is to be by section, the instructor commands: Section, FIRE, and the pieces are fired together; if the firing is to be by piece, the instructor commands Right (or left) piece-FIRE, and the piece designated is discharged. These commands are not repeated by the chiefs of pieces. In both cases the pieces are again loaded as soon as discharged, but await the orders of the instructor for firing. If after the loading is completed, or at any time, the instructor gives the command COMMENCE FIRING, the firing is continued by the chiefs of pieces under the direction of the chief of section. For the real execution of the firings, the instructor gives the preparatory commands: Load with cartridges, (or shot-shell, etc. as the case may be) LOAD, or COMMENCE FIRING. These SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 273 commands are repeated by the chiefs of pieces and of the section. The firing is discontinued at the command or signal CEASE FIRING, which is repeated by the chiefs of pieces and of the section. At this command, such pieces as are loaded must be fired, or the load withdrawn, except in the case where the section retires with the prolonge fixed. In no case should a piece be limbered whilst loaded. To draw the load, the worm is used by No. 1, and No. 2 takes charge of the ammunition. TO FIRE TO THE REAR. 478. The section being in battery, in order to fire in the opposite direction, the instructor causes the firing to cease, and commands: 1. Fire to the rear. 2. Limbers and caissons, pass your pieces-trot. 3. MARCH. (PLATE 71.) At the command MARCH, the pieces are wheeled about by turning the trails to the left, the limbers and caissons oblique to the right, pass their pieces, gain sufficient distance, and take their places in battery by a left reverse. In horse artillery, the horses follow their limbers, pass them, and take their places by a left reverse. When the horse holders cannot conduct them alone, they are assisted by Nos. I and 2. When the pieces cannot be turned by hand, the instructor commands: 1. Fire to the rear. 2. Limbers to the rear. 3. Caissons, pass your pieces-trot-MARCH. 4. Pieces, left about —MARCH. 5. IN BATTERY. 18 :PA=R.ET iV. SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. ARTICLE FIRST. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. THE manoeuvres of a field battery are intended to furnish the instruction required for conducting its movements and formations, in all.situations in which it can be employed. These manceuvres are taught to the non-commissioned officers theoretically and practically. The theoretical instruction should embrace everything under the head of general remarks. The practical instruction should commence with the most simple movements, executed at a walk, and as the instruction advances the gait should be increased. Each movement should be repeated until it is fully understood, and executed without hesitation, by all who co-operate in its performance. The text applies especially to batteries whose cannoneers are not mounted; but it becomes equally applicable to horse artillery, by inserting the proper intervals and distances with the detachments of mounted cannoneers. (See the orders in column, in line, and in battery.) When the detachments in horse artillery are required to make any particular movements, directions will be given for them. But in general, as they have only to follow 2 yards in rear of the muzzles of their pieces, they will not be mentioned. The movements are described for one flank only. They may be executed by the other flank, according to the same principles, and by inverse means. (274) SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 275 FORMATIONS OF THE BATTERY. 479. The three following orders constitute the different formations of the battery of manceuvre. 1. ORDER IN COLUMN. 2. ORDER IN LINE. 3. ORDER IN BATTERY. (PLATE 27.) The order in column is that in which the battery is formed by sections; the carriages being in two files, and each piece being followed or preceded by its caisson. The captain is generally 14 yards from the column and opposite to its centre. But during the manceuvres he moves wherever his presence may be most'necessary, and where his commands may be best heard. Each chief of section is in line with his leading drivers, and midway between his leading carriages. The chief of the line of caissons is in line with the captain, on the opposite side of the column, and 4 yards from it. But he does not change his position to conform to that of the captain. Each chief of piece is on the left and near the leading driver of his leading carriage. In horse artillery, when the chiefs of caissons are mounted, each chief of carriage is near its leading driver on the left. The trumpeters are near the captain. The guidon is habitually next the chief of the leading piece, or guide of the leading section, but takes post wherever the captain may direct. In mounted batteries. The interval between the carriages is 14 yards. The distance between the carriages is 2 yards. The cannoneers are in file on each side of their pieces, or mounted on the chests. In horse artillery. The interval between the carriages is 17 yards. The distance between the carriages, and between the carriages and detachments, is 2 yards. 276, SCHOOL OF TIIE BATTERY. The detachments, formed in two ranks, are 2 yards in rear of their pieces. In both kinds of artillery, these arrangements for the column are the same whether the pieces or caissons lead. ORDER IN LINE. (PLATE 28.) The order in line is that in which the carriages are formed in two lines; the horses all facing in the same direction, the pieces limbered, and each followed or preceded by its caisson. The captain is generally 4 yards in front of the centre. But, during the manceuvres, he goes wherever his presence may be most necessary, and where his commands may be best heard. Each chief of section is in line with his leading drivers, and midway between the leading carriages of his section. The chief of the line of caissons is opposite the centre, 4 yards behind the rear line of carriages. Each chief of piece and caisson is in the same position as in column. The trumpeter, when he does not accompany the captain, is in line with the leading drivers, and 4 yards from the right flank. The guidon is on the left of the trumpeter. In foot artillery. The interval between the carriages is 14 yards. The distance between the two lines is 2 yards. The cannoneers are at their posts as in column. In horse artillery. The interval between the carriages is 17 yards. The distance between the lines of pieces, detachments, and caissons is 2 yards. The detachments are 2 yards in rear of their pieces. In both kinds of artillery, these arrangements for the line are the same whether the pieces or caissons lead. SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 277 ORDER IN BATTERY. (PLATE 29.) The order in battery is that in which the pieces are prepared for firing; the pieces, limbers, and caissons being turned towards the enemy, and formed in three parallel lines. The captain is generally on the left of the chief of the centre section; but he may go wherever his presence is required. Each chief of section is habitually in the centre of his section, half way between the lines of pieces and limbers. The chief of the line of caissons is opposite the centre, 4 yards in rear of the line of caissons. Each chief of piece is outside the file on the left of his piece; but near it, and opposite the middle of the trail handspike. During the real execution of the firings, he habitually dismounts and gives the reins of his horse to the driver of the wheel horses of the limber, and takes his place on the right or left of the piece, in such position as will best enable him to observe the effect of the shot. Each chief of caisson is on the left, and 4 yards in rear of the limber of the piece. In horse artillery, he gives the reins of his horse to the driver of the wheel horses of the caisson. The trumpeters are near the captain. The guidon is on the flank of the line of caissons. In mounted batteries. The interval between the pieces is 14 yards. The distance between the lines of pieces and limbers is 6 yards, measuring from the end of the handspike to the heads of the leading horses. The distance between the lines of limbers and caissons is 11 yards, measuring from the rear of the limbers to the heads of the leading horses of the caissons. The cannoneers are at their posts. In horse artillery. The interval between the pieces is 17 yards. Y 2f 13 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. The distance between the lines of pieces and limbers is 6 yards; measured as before. The distance between the lines of limbers and caissons is 11 yards; measured as before. The cannoneers are at their posts. The detachments of horses are 4 yards in rear of the limbers. The regular formation in battery should be always preserved in the manceuvres. But on the field of battle the front would be commonly more extended; the pieces being posted so as to obtain the greatest advantage from the nature of the ground, and the caissons sheltered as much as possible. When the battery retires firing, the horses and drivers in both kinds of artillery remain faced to the rear, after the first retrograde movement, that they may be ready to continue it. REMARKS ON THE FORMATIONS OF THE BATTERY. During the manceuvres the captain is followed by the trumpeters, who must not leave him. On receiving an order from the captain for that purpose, they take the places assigned them in the order in line. The guidon takes the place assigned him in the order in column, in line, or in battery, unless otherwise instructed by the captain, who directs him to take such position as he may think necessary. The double column is a particular case of formation in column with a front of two pieces. It is formed on the centre section as head of the column; each of the other sections being in column of pieces in rear. When the battery contains four or eight pieces, the double column is formed upon the two central pieces as before. When the caissons are detached, which is frequently the case with horse artillery, and sometimes with mounted batteries, the intervals and distances between the pieces for manceuvring will be the same as though the caissons were present; so that the necessary ground for wheeling into line, etc., may be preserved. Plate 24 OliDinal littermediat' _ Final. P\ sitiol.. Position. Position. Piece drawn by..........................................-....................... Ca'ison drawn by si. hor es..................-. Piece in battZery wiith/, ivs It *1 spa i k, e...........- --------—.................................... c,,,,,e,,im'daw 1,e. i,, -,'a,.fw............. 1 Vetachmnentt horses in clharge of the ht7mre Zholde7...o..w..Ar..e...y............. Gun7 detachmIaent ).-: t h lowtt ltec at t...y............................................................ Cap.taint o 7wnrt L ti ta te battety...........................ti.e.. ieuL. coninandr C l..........................................................................................Nr. c i. Clzhief of tief lint.e of etaji.sisonts..........................................................cc,.................... LCietif of p iece iq oun ted battey..................................................................... Chietf of c ai sso o se. a illery............. ^.............................. —............... Chief ofp iece, ss o m te d bt ter...............h...o e.................. (C~hief' o f t te l zt a issot.................................................................. eCannfoneer f at hs postof cais......o................................................................................................... Ch~ief ofaiece dsm~ hountied otpiece....................................................... Hor-se not MaountedCtBp f ass o......................................................... —. —........._. ~]zlzcieo ont d baistt e:.............e B ngaleeer o p.r......................... ran tc.............................. c/ie of i P ce d o l d at i p o t......................................................:................ detac72e7nt in. an7 origzinal, inaternediate, or filnacpositioT onr in. a ciatnqe of direction7. -~~ —------------ -— ~ -Indicates ca7ninterwiediate position.7. ~>>> The dir7ection.7 in.'icJL tile plates shouldtitI be seen. 1o 5 o Scale o-f Yarls. 10 20 30 40 50 60 Plate 2.5. / an " e ^) 11 _==;;.zz / -~'^ ti ^ - --- ---------------- S'''' ^ ^"" ~s ^ ^p' 4*4*^ & U h:^ ir s ^ I 1^ ^` Miounted Al-tlley. GVorse tArtel erv. (4eLt dl ors rtillery. Artil y. ^~ —- 7 —-—. -~.,_.... -— ~ —.~-~ —---- ^~- ---— ~ —~` -- i e e ea~,-^ —,, e-. -.f itdson Ze-di-.,s-a-< —-X —-,- ^v-r-xt- - >' - f fi —-; X r r -- ----- ------- I 6 / JQt I," I "r, I'-, I" ni t I, *7e a ofh tw c a zzm y1 ^ze I II.ote. -77e trcks of the litrtbe' wheels are indicated byv fitli linese the, track ofthe off leader by b'oken lines. II,, I,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~^ ______________,_________________________________ c-iI., rn <....... -— l _ - — t. 2.. 2 4 X ^ ~~~~~~~~ ~~~ A —---— ~- ~.-.. —---—.en~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 1 5.;5' 2 S14 t' I I 3- OF -—.._,_ ^ ~ z~i "~ " " L \ ^ ~^ ^ ~ ^ " ^ ^" ~~Gs-x^&-~i&-r^T.J^.'^^'^^ ^^^^ "SSSUL ^"'~"'^~'3e>^ 7 ^~ ~~'^^ ~~ colq~ ^o m ^ ^^ ^^`iZ V. \~ ~ -— ^i3~ ~3 -^N __ < — ^ —-.^ ^.4,.. - ^'^ ^'^'s"^^"'ss'^^_FT- ='""^~^~"'~-'^"Sj?^',j~~.. ~~~^5^~'3g^~'~""7~l?^ ^ ~t" i-^au~~~~ga-gg~a-rA' ^l ^ S3 ~z-~^^~?-^^^ ^^^?";^^^ ^~~ ^^E^~^~5~U~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~j-^i ^ ~ ~ ~~~ -^~ ^ ^ ^'' ^ {^ ~ ~~~~~~ ~^~~~ —~mnr~'''n-t~t zI o u __late 28 Iouneted Bcltte7y t47L4 g —tg763 76 7.0 St4I 7- ----— X —----- ii' g Sectiowz7 -1 4 1 - 2 -I = 5 -~,~ II ^ \ — -2x. ----- ~ ^-^^ ^ I \ " ^ N^ J ^ ^ ^0 —;; _ __ _~ __ __. -u-uu- -- -------------- -- _ \I'' — -- -------------- -- _ _!! <~~~ ~ ---— S-x —--------- lj PH I&Y H / / // / --------— f4 nzal rt/So/ ~~,;"".. 5'; g$Cb=4 IOQ I Qpp/Iy2?2f >y7 /d tip? Q s tV. """W 1S - 77E'- ~ ^ — ^ ^- ^ ^^~-'- ^^^~~~~~~~~~~ —----- ~'7I "^c;.' ~* - a- i'K^ ~ ~ — ~~ iQ sf' \^~ ~f i i ^> ^>E n^ +h "s^ s^ f —--- SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 291 the right carriages of the leading section move forward at a moderate trot. The left carriages of the same section commence the trot on obliquing to enter the column. The other sections are broken successively by the same commands from their chiefs; and the carriages are regulated by each other, as in breaking sections at a walk. This formation is executed from the left according to the same principles, and by inverse means. IN COLUMN WITH THE CAISSONS ON THE FLANK, TO REPLACE THEM IN FRONT OR REAR. 498. The battery being in column, with the caissons on the flank, to re-establish them in rear of their pieces, the captain commands: 1. Caissons, rear, (or Caissons, rear-trot.) 2. MARcH. Each chief of section repeats the commands in time to command MARCH, when the leading piece of his section is to commence the movement; and they are executed as prescribed in No. 463. TO FORM THE PARK. 499. The battery being in column of pieces, and near the ground on which it is to be parked, will be formed by the commands, and according to the principles, prescribed in No. 464. Each chief of section directs the march of his carriages, and each carriage is conducted to its place in park by its particular chief. When the nature of the ground requires, the detachments are ordered to leave their pieces successively, when they are about entering the park. 292 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. ARTICLE THIRD. TO PASS FROM THE ORDER IN COLUMN TO THE ORDER IN LINE, AND THE REVERSE. In all formations in line or column, the movements are the same, whether the pieces or caissons lead. FORWARD INTO LINE. 500. The battery being in column at a halt, to form it into line on the head of the column, gaining ground to the left, the captain commands: 1. Forward into line-left oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. 4. FRONT. (PLATE 36.) At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands: Section-forward, and those of the other sections, Secticn-left oblique. At the command MARCH, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the leading section moves to the front, and its chief repeats the command for the guide. After advancing 18 yards, or for horse artillery 22, he commands: Section-IHALT-Right-DRESS. Each of the other chiefs of sections repeats the command for the guide, and conducts his section by a left oblique, until by the direct march it may gain its proper interval from the section immediately on its right. He then commands: FORWARD, and when within four yards of the line, Section-HALT-BightDRESS. When the battery is aligned, the captain commands: FRONT. t1-^ It'"''~,,,'...... i — ] I AL:'< \::l "J - ^t - iJ TK i'~-.h^':I~, ~'+ ^ ^- ^ \^ ^ ^^ $ Ax l +p tp L~~. __ ^'^ ^ 1-^ _____ ____ _____ ________ ________________________________:Pa! -te 3 7.. il -., - --- ----; ---- -...I. -1.1' "'.,,, "" " " "'.' I',,,' I ___ ___ _______ __ ________`~~~~~~~~~~ I', _ I. JJ-i-L^l'^^^ -M~~~n" O`~^ II~~~~ SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 293 The movement is executed on the opposite flank according to the same principles, and by inverse means. In this case the commands are: Forward into line-right oblique-MARCH Guide left-FRONT. The formation forward into line, by a right or left oblique, is executed in a similar manner when the column is in march. In this case the chief of the leading section gives no command except for the guide, until he has advanced the distance before prescribed. He then halts his section as before. TO FORM LINE FACED TO THE REAR. 501. The battery being in column at a halt, to form it into line faced to the rear, on the head of the column gaining ground to the left, the captain commands: 1. Into line faced to the rear —left oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. 4. FRONT. (PLATE 37.) At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands: Section-forward; and those of the other sections: Section-left oblique. At the command MARCH, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the movement is executed as in No. 500, with the exception of the alignment. When the leading section has advanced 18 yards, or for horse artillery 22, it is halted by its chief until the centre section arrives upon the same line. He then commands: Countermarch-MARCHr; and when the countermarch is nearly completed, Section-HALT-LeftDRESS. The centre section is halted upon the line in like manner until the left section comes up, and is then countermarched and aligned by the same commands. When the left section arrives upon the line, it is countermarched before halting, and then aligned like the rest. When the centre and left sections are countermarched, the commands, HALT-Left-DREss, should be given, if possible, z 2 29 J4 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. when they are 4 yards in rear of the line on which the leading section is established. When the battery is aligned, the captain commands: FRONT. The movement is executed on the opposite flank according to the same principles, and by inverse means. In this case, the commands are: Into line faced to the rear-right oblique-MARCH — Guide left-FRONT. The formation into line faced to the rear, by a right or left oblique, is executed in a similar manner when the column is in march. In this case, as the leading section is already in motion, its chief only repeats the command for the guide, as in No. 500. The countermarch of sections will be executed at the gait ordered for the rear of the column. TO FORM LINE TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 502. The battery being in column, in march, or at a halt, to form it into line to the left, the captain commands: 1. Left into line wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. Battery — ALT. 4. Left-DRESS. 5. FRONT. (PLATE 38.) At the first command, the chiefs of sections command: Section-left wheel; and at the second, which they repeat, all the sections wheel to the left. Each chief of section commands: Forward-Guide left, as soon as his leading pivot carriage has taken the new direction. When the rear carriages have completed the wheel, and the sections are in line, the captain commands: Battery-HALTLeft-DRESS. The commands, HALT-Left-DRESS, are repeated by the chiefs of sections, and when the alignment is completed, the captain commands: FRONT. The battery is formed into line to the right according to the same principles, and by inverse means. A -1 I I I.. A -1- -t ++ t-Y i + ~ I -I I II > I> "~ I II" ^- + - - -—, — T'. Go -A Plitte 39. <,/2,/,/iK i - -- - - - - - - - - - 3"- - - ~-/ j —--- — i I!,i',,'~i i! ilvi _c —- 8 II I ^ I i " iiI ~H^ ^~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 295 TO FORM LINE ON THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 503. The battery marching in column, to form it into line on the right, the captain commands: 1. On the right into line. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. 4. FRONT. (PLATE 39.) At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands: Section-right wheel; and at the second, which he repeats, the section wheels to the right. As soon as the leading pivot carriage enters the new direction he commands: FoRWARD-Guide right; and as the section completes the wheel, and unmasks the column, he commands: Section-HALT-BightDRESS. The chiefs of the other sections repeat the command for the guide, and their sections continue to move forward. As each section passes the one preceding it in the formation, its chief establishes it on the line, with the proper interval, by the same commands. The commands, Section-HALT-tight-DRESS, are given when the section is 4 yards in rear of the line. When the battery is aligned, the captain commands: FRONT. The line is formed on the left according to the same principles, and by inverse means. The commands are: On the left into line-MARcH-Guide left-FRONT. When the column is at a halt, the line is formed on the right or left in the same manner. In this case, the chiefs of the two rear sections command: Section-forward, and afterwards repeat the commands, MARCH-Guide right (or left.) TO BREAK INTO COLUMN TO THE FRONT. 504. The battery being in line at a halt, to break into column to the front from the right, the captain commands: 1. By section from the right-front into column. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide left. 29 6 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. (PLATE 40.) At the first command, the chief of the right section commands: Section-forward; and those of the other sections: Section-right oblique. At the command MARCH, repeated by the chief of the right section, that section moves forward, and its chief repeats the command for the guide. Each of the other chiefs of sections repeats the commands MARCrI-Guide left, after the section on his right has commenced the movement, and when the leaders of its rear carriages are in line with him. After obliquing sufficiently to gain the rear of the preceding section, he commands: FORWARD. To commence the movement at a trot, the captain commands: 1. By section from the right-front into column-trot. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide left. At the first command, the chief of the right section commands: Section-forward-trot; those of the other sections: Sectionforward. At the command MARCH, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the right section moves at a trot, and the other sections at a walk, their chiefs adding the command for the guide. The chiefs of the centre and left sections command: Sectionright oblique-trot, in time to command MARCH, when the leaders of the rear carriages of the section on their right are opposite to them. This rule for commencing movements at a trot is general. The movement is executed from the left according to the same principles, and by inverse means. TO BREAK INTO COLUMN TO THE REAR. 505. The battery being in line, in march, or at a halt, to break into column to the rear from one of the flanks, the captain executes an about or a countermarch, according to the kind of carriage he may wish in front, then halts the battery, and breaks it into column to the front by the preceding manceuvre. C C N''"^ - --- -.. - - - - - K^ "^ "^ N^ I ^\ \ ^\~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~c N.\ ~_^ <'-~~"?'r""^~g~5~~*.IA' -sfC' \ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 2 -- - - -- - - -- - - - -- ^ - -. -. -. - ^... - - -- - - -- - -. -- - - -—. -— s a _7l i t - ----- ----- —;T —-~ —- - -- - - - --- Q'"-.. J ^ I ^' I w~ l i w f ~ 1 i'.? *'^t,, 4- ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ r -t -^ -I.2 11''-' _J;JTJ.; 1I 1~ ~I x,'"',' xto m j~ ~ d c- - a- - s- -^ 7 -- - - - ---- - - - l -^ - \ ^ \ \ a ^c:I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ^;i::: ~:~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~51~~~~~~1 __________________________________________________________________________________ _____ __ _ _ _____ _ SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 297 TO BREAK INTO COLUMN TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 506. The battery being in line, in march, or at a halt, to break it into column to the left, the captain commands: 1. By section-left wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide left. (PLATE 41.) At the first command, the chiefs of sections command: Section-left wheel; and at the second, repeated by those chiefs, all the sections wheel to the left. When the wheels are nearly completed, the captain commands: FORWARD-Guide left; and the chiefs of sections repeat the commands. When the column is not to advance, the command, ColumnHALT, is substituted for FORWARD-Guide left. The battery is broken into column to the right according to the same principles, and by inverse means. TO BREAK INTO COLUMN TO THE FRONT FROM ONE FLANK, TO MARCH TOWARDS THIE OTHER. 507. The battery being in line at a halt, to break from the right to march to the left, the captain commands: 1. By section-break from the right-to march to the left. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide left. (PLATE 42.) At the first command, the chief of the right section commands: Section-forward; and at the second, which he repeats, the section moves forward, and he commands: Guide left. After advancing 11 yards, he changes the direction to the left by the commands: Section-left wheel-MARCH-FORWARD. Each of the other chiefs of sections commands: Section-forward, in time to command MARCH when the limber wheels of the rear carriages in the section preceding his own arrive in front of him. He then conducts the section to the front, changes its direction to the left, and places it in rear of the preceding sec 298 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. tion by the commands already prescribed for the section on the right. The battery is broken from the left to march to the right according to the same principles, and by inverse means. TO BREAK INTO COLUMN TO THE REAR FROM ONE FLANK, TO MARCH TOWARDS THE OTHER. 508. The battery being in line at a halt, to break to the rear from one flank to march towards the other, the captain first executes an about or countermarch, according to the kind of carriage he may wish in front. He then halts the battery and executes the preceding manceuvre. TO BREAK INTO COLUMN TO THE FRONT, WHEN THE BATTERY IS MARCHING IN LINE. 509. The battery marching in line at a walk, to break into column to the front from the right, and at the same gait, the captain commands: 1. By the right-break into sections. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide left. The chief of the right section repeats the command for the guide, and his section continues to move at the same gait. At the command MARCH, the other sections are halted by the command, Section-HALT, from their chiefs. The halted sections are put in motion successively by their chiefs; each commanding, Section-right oblique, in time to command MARCH, when the leaders of the rear carriages in the section on his right arrive opposite to him. The sections oblique and enter the column as described in No. 504. When the battery is marching at a trot, the movement is executed according to the same principles. But the sections which halted in the preceding case slacken the gait to a walk at the commands, Walk-MARCH, from their chiefs. They again trot and enter the column by the commands, Section-right oblique -trot-MARCHI-FORWARD. SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 299 When the battery is marching in line at a walk, to break into column from the right at a trot, the captain commands: 1. By the right-break into sections-trot. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide left. At the first command, the chief of the right section commands: Trot; and at the second, which he repeats, the section changes its gait to a trot. He afterwards repeats the command, Guide left. Each of the other sections continues to march at a walk until required to enter the column, when its chief conducts it, as already described, by the commands, Section-right oblique-trot — MARCH-FORWARD. The battery is broken into column from the left according to the same principles, and by inverse means. TO FORM LINE ADVANCING. 510. When the battery is marching in column at a walk, to form it into line at a trot gaining ground to the left, and continue the march, the captain commands: 1. Form line advancing-left oblique-trot. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. The chief of the leading section repeats the command for the guide, and his section continues to move at a walk. At the first command, the chiefs of the other sections command: Section-left oblique-trot. The command MARCH is repeated by the same chiefs; and when the oblique movement is commenced, they repeat the command, Guide right. Each chief commands: FORWARD, as soon as his section has obliqued sufficiently to the left, and Walk, in time to command MARCH, as it arrives on the line. When the battery is marching in column at a trot, the movement is executed according to the same principles. In this case the captain does not command Trot; and the chief of the leading 300 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. section commands: Walk —MARCiH, successively after the first and second commands of the captain. The chiefs of the other sections give the same commands as their sections arrive on the line. The movement is executed so as to gain ground to the right according to the same principles, and by inverse means. TO FORM DOUBLE COLUMN ON TIIE CENTRE SECTION. 511. The battery being in line at a halt, to form double column on the centre section, the captain commands: 1. Double column on the centre. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right (or left.) (PLATE 43.) At the first command, the chief of the centre section commands: Section-forward; the chief of the right section: Section-left oblique; and the chief of the left section: Section-right oblique. At the command MARCH, repeated by the chief of the centre section, that section marches to the front, and its chief repeats the command for the guide. When the wheel horses in the rear rank of the centre section have passed the leaders in the front rank of the other sections, the chiefs of those sections repeat the command MARCH, and the sections commence the oblique. When the piece nearest the column is about entering it, in each of these sections, the chief of the right section commands: By the left-break section-MARCH; and the chief of the left: By the right-break section-MARCH. The right and left sections, without change of gait, then form into columns of pieces in rear of the right and left carriages of the centre section. The chiefs of the flank sections are careful to make their pieces enter the column at the proper time. When the column is formed they place themselves 4 yards outside of it, the one highest in rank opposite the leaders of his leading carriage, the other opposite the leaders of the front carriage of his rear piece. In these positions they command the pieces abreast of them as sections for the time being. --- -> t-I, S'~-, K.,, ",~.','c: n c: ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ _ ____ _____ ____________________ _ _ SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 301 The chief of the line of caissons follows the movement, sees that his carriages do not enter the column too soon, and, when the column is formed, places himself 4 yards in rear of its centre. When the battery is marching at a walk, to form the double column at the same gait, the captain commands: 1. Double column on the centre. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right (or left.) The chief of the centre section repeats the command for the guide, and the section continues to advance. At the command MARCH, the other sections are halted by the command, Section-HALT, from their chiefs. They are afterwards formed into column by the commands and means prescribed for forming double column from a halt. When the battery is marching at a trot, the double column is formed according to the same principles. In this case the flank sections pass to a walk, instead of halting as before, and resume the trot, to oblique and enter the column. The commands from their chiefs are: Walk —MARCH-Section-left (or right) oblique -trot-MARCH, and, By the left (or right)-break sectionMARCH. When the battery is marching at a walk, to form the double column at a trot, the captain commands: 1. Double column on the centre-trot. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right (or left.) At the first command, the chief of the centre section commands: Trot. At the second, which he repeats, the section moves forward at a moderate trot, and he repeats the command for the guide. The flank sections continue to walk until the centre has advanced sufficiently to allow them to oblique, and are then formed into column as already prescribed; their chiefs commanding: Section-left (or right) oblique-trot-MARH; and, By the left (or right)-break section-MARCH. 2 A 302 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. If the battery is at a halt, the chief of the centre section commands: Forward-trot; and the chiefs of the other sections, Forward, after the first command from the captain. At the second, repeated by the chiefs of sections, all move forward, the flank sections at a walk; and the movement is completed as already directed. To form the double column with a battery of four or of eight pieces, the captain gives the same commands as with a battery of six. In the four-gun battery, the right section is broken into column of pieces by the left, and the left section is broken by the right at the commands of the chiefs of sections, who place themselves on the outer flanks of the column and command the temporary sections, as directed for the flank sections of the battery of six pieces. In the battery of eight pieces, the double column is formed on the two centre pieces according to the same principles. The flank sections oblique, and form in column of pieces behind the centre sections at the commands of their chiefs, who then take post on the flanks of the column, and command the temporary sections formed from their own, the senior of the two commanding the leading one. TO DEPLOY THE DOUBLE COLUMN INTO LINE TO THE FRONT. 512. The battery being in double column at a halt, to form it into line to the front, the captain commands: 1. Forward into line. 2. MARCH. 3. FRONT. (PLATE 44.) At the first command, the chief of the centre section commands: Section-forward; the chief of the right section: Section into line-right oblique; and the chief of the left section: Section into line-left oblique. At the command MARCH, repeated by these chiefs, the centre section advances 5 yards, and its chief commands: Section-HALT-Right (or left) DRESS. The flank sections oblique to the right and left; and as their P % K riD,: ------ "" --- - n x --------—.- 4 -; ^.t I, i'. X ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ S ^^ "^'_________. l.. H SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 303 pieces arrive in rear of their proper places on the line, they move forward, halt, and dress towards the centre without command. As soon as the battery is aligned, the captain commands: FRONT. When the column is marching, the movement is executed in the same manner. In this case the chief of the centre section does not command, Section-forward-MARCH; but halts and aligns his section after advancing 5 yards. 513. When the column is marching at a trot, to deploy it into line to the front at the same gait, without discontinuing the march, the captain commands: 1. Form line advancing. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right (or left.) At the first command, the chief of the centre section commands: Walk; the chief of the right section: Section into lineright oblique; and the chief of the left section: Section into line — left oblique. At the command MARCH, repeated by these chiefs, the centre section slackens its gait to a walk, and the flank sections deploy. As each piece arrives upon the line, its gait is changed to a walk without command. The movement is executed as in the preceding cases; but when the line is formed it continues to advance; the captain commanding, Guide right (or left,) which command is repeated by the chiefs of sections. When the column is marching at a walk, to deploy it into line to the front at a trot, without discontinuing the march, the captain commands: 1. Form line advancing-trot. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right (or left.) At the first command, the chief of the right section commands: Section into line-right oblique-trot; and the chief of the left section: Section into line-left oblique-trot. At the command MARCH, repeated by these chiefs, the flank sections deploy at a trot; the centre section continues to march at a walk; and, the 304 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. line having been formed as in the preceding case, the captain gives the command for the guide. When the battery consists of four or eight pieces, the double column is deployed into line to the front by the same commands from the captain as when it consists of six. The chiefs of sections give the same commands as in the other case, and the centre sections are formed as in No. 486. When the line is to be halted, as in forming forward into line, the leading chief commands: HALT-Bight (or left) DRESS, as soon as the leading carriages have advanced 5 yards; and the alignment is made upon the central carriages. TO FORM THE DOUBLE COLUMN INTO LINE TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 514. The battery being in double column at a halt, to form it into line to the right, the captain commands: 1. To and on the right into line. 2. MARCH. 3. FRONT. At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands: Section-right wheel; and the other chiefs of sections: Forward. At the second, repeated by those chiefs, the leading section wheels to the right, and is established on the line, as in No. 503. The other pieces advance under the direction of their chiefs and of the chiefs of sections, wheel to the right in succession as they arrive opposite their places, establish themselves on the line, and dress upon the pieces already aligned. When the alignment is completed, the captain commands: FRONT. When the column is marching, the line is formed to the right in the same manner, except that the chiefs of the flank sections omit the commands, Forward-MARCH. The line is formed to the left according to the same principles, and by inverse means. When the battery consists of four or of eight pieces, the double column is deployed into line to the right or left by the same commands from the captain as when it consists of six. In this case, SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 305 the leading pieces are wheeled to the right or left, as a section, and established on the line, as in No. 503. For this purpose, the leading chief of section commands: Right (or left) wheelMARCH-FORWARD-Guide right-(or left) —HALT-Bight (or left) DRESS. The other pieces move forward, wheel in succession as they arrive opposite their places, and form on the line, as already described. 20 2A2 306 SCIIOOL OF TIIE BATTERY. ARTICLE FOURTH. MOVEMENTS IN LINE. TO ADVANCE IN LINE. 515. THE battery being in line at a halt, to cause it to advance, the captain indicates to the guide the points on which he is to march, and commands: 1. Battery-forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right (or left.) The commands, Forward-MARCH-Guide right (or left,) are repeated by the chiefs of sections. At the command MARCH, all the carriages move forward at a walk, and the chiefs of sections preserve the alignment towards that chief of carriage who serves as guide of the line. The guide marches steadily in the given direction, and the chiefs of carriages regulate their intervals and alignment by him. The carriages of the rear rank follow those in front at their appropriate distance of 2 yards. The chief of the line of caissons superintends the march of the rear rank of carriages, and moves wherever his presence may be necessary for that purpose. In horse artillery, the detachments preserve their alignments, and follow their pieces at the proper distance. They are sometimes upon the flanks, as pointed out in No. 444. TO HALT THE BATTERY AND ALIGN IT. 516. When the battery is marching in line, to halt and align it, the captain commands: 1. Battery-HALT. 2. Right (or left) DRESS. 3. FRONT. Q "t ct ~2W94-6 ii. Jlfburttctc B ate/ j-.- - -X - - - -. - - - - -.,,m" I I I l'l lA Il llaC 4F..'~ 4,^4-.~~.~....4....... ~F2^~~~~~~~~~c Pla-te 46. A —' —- -~ —--, ---- --------, ------------- ---- ----- -- i' i'' I —------------- ~~^ ^ I ir- --------------- Ad! U' ^' L U~' ~ ""'^:a'^' ^ I c6 3^' "^ "^ ^+',w::JI,~r~ 1 O 1 O1b ^^^~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~"~"',, —.,,... ^ ^\ ^,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, I I ^ ^^i^-^ 1-i SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 30T The commands, HALT-Right (or left) DRESS, are repeated by the chiefs of sections. At the first command, the carriages and detachments halt, and at the second align themselves by the right (or left) in their respective ranks; the carriages dressing by the drivers of their wheel horses. The carriages are placed as squarely on the line as possible, without opening or closing the intervals. The captain superintends the alignment of the front rank of carriages, and the chief of the line of caissons that of the rear; each placing himself for that purpose on the flank of the guide. When the battery is aligned, the captain commands: FRONT. When the battery is halted, if it cannot be aligned by slight movements, the captain causes one or two carriages from one of the flanks or centre to advance 4 yards, or to a greater distance if necessary, and then causes the alignment to be made by the right, left, or centre, by the command, Right, Left, or, On the centre-DRESS. At this command, the carriages and detachments move forward, and align themselves according to the principles just explained; the drivers halting a little in rear of the line, and dressing forward, so as to place the carriages as squarely upon it as possible. CHANGES OF GAIT. 517. When the battery is marching in line, the changes of gait are effected by the commands and means prescribed in No. 485. TO MARCH BY A FLANK. 518. (PLATES 45 and 46.) The battery being in line, in march, or at a halt, to cause it to move in the direction of one of its flanks, the captain commands: 1. Battery-by the right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH. And the movement is executed as prescribed in No. 491. OBLIQUE MARCH. 519. (PLATES 47 and 48.) The battery being in line, in 308 SCHOOL OF TIE BATTERY. march, or at a halt, to gain ground to the front and towards one of the flanks, and afterwards resume the direct march, the captain commands: Battery-right (or left) oblique, etc., as in No. 492. The movement is executed as described in that number. PASSAGE OF CARRIAGES IN LINE. 520. When the battery is in line, the passage of carriages is executed by the commands and means prescribed in No. 460. ABOUT IN LINE. 521. When the battery is in line, the about is executed by the commands and means prescribed in No. 494, substituting the word battery for column. COUNTERMARCH IN LINE. 522. The countermarch of a battery in line is executed by the commands and means prescribed in No. 495, substituting the word battery for column. TO CHANGE DIRECTION IN LINE. 523. The battery being in line at a halt, to wheel it to the right, the captain commands: 1. Battery-right wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Battery-HALT. 5. Right-DRESS. 6. FRONT. The commands, Bight wheel-MARCH-FORWARD-~HALTBight-DREss, are repeated by the chiefs of sections. (PLATE 49.) At the command MARCH, the pivot carriage moves at a walk, and describes a quadrant (22 yards) of a circle whose radius is 14 yards. The other carriages move at a trot and preserve their intervals from the pivot. They regulate their gaits according to their distances from the pivot, so as to remain FPlate 4.9 -~-~ X.... A....................I'.! i" ^~~''< i^ - - - - i i — - - t'-'l rf - i'''' r'^''~'t j~~~~~~~~~~~ft- ^^:~~~~~. iL. ^ ^ ^ ^v r~~~~~~~~~~~P^ r ^ "^ — ^~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ E ^ ^:?: ^ ---,. I,,~~~~""..,,,.~ ~ ~ ~~~~~~''~, ~ ~32f~I -~~~~~a ~ ~i. SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 309 as short a time as possible in rear of the line, without urging their horses injuriously, and so as to arrive upon it in succession. The carriages of the rear rank follow at the proper distance in the tracks of those in front. At the command FORWARD, which is given when the leading pivot carriage has described its arc of 22 yards, that carriage moves direct to the front; and when the rear pivot carriage is in the new direction, the captain commands: Battery-HALTRight-DREss. The commands, FORWARD-HALT-Right-DRESS, are repeated by the chief of the right section immediately after the captain; and by the other chiefs in time to be applicable to their sections; the pivot carriages halting at the command HALT, and the others halting and dressing towards the pivot as they arrive in succession on the line. When the battery is aligned, the captain commands: FRONT. The battery is wheeled to the left according to the same principles, and by inverse means. 524. When the battery is at a halt or marching in line, to wheel it to the right and continue the march, the captain commands: 1. Battery-right wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. The movement is executed as already described, except that the pivot carriage, after wheeling, continues to march in the new direction, and the others conform to its gait and direction as they arrive on the line. The direction is changed to the left according to the same principles, and by inverse means. TO CLOSE INTERVALS IN LINE. 525. When the battery is marching in line at a walk or trot, to diminish its intervals, the captain commands: 1. On right (or left) piece, of -- section, to - yards -close intervals. 2. MARCH. 310 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. (PLATE 50.) The chief of the section designated repeats the command, On right (or left) piece, to - yards-close intervals; and the other chiefs of sections command: Right (or left) to - yards-close intervals. At the command MARCH, repeated by the same chiefs, the piece designated as the one of direction moves forward at a walk, and the others oblique towards it at a trot. Each obliquing carriage regulates its march by the one next towards the carriage of direction, and, after closing to the prescribed interval, moves forward on the alignment of the directing-carriage and slackens the gait to a walk. As soon as the intervals are closed, the command for the guide is renewed by the captain, and repeated by the chiefs of sections. When the intervals are to be closed towards one of the flanks, the captain commands: 1. On right (or left) piece, to yards-close intervals. 2. MARCH. ABOUT OR COUNTERMARCH WITH DIMINISHED INTERVALS. 526. The battery being in line with diminished intervals, in march or at a halt, to execute an about or countermarch, the captain commands: 1. Pieces and caissons-left about, (or countermarch.) 2. Right pieces forward, (or right pieces forward-trot.) 3. MARCH. The chiefs of sections repeat these commands. At the second, the right carriages of each section move forward, and as soon as they are disengaged from the line, the captain commands: MARCH. All the carriages execute the required movement at this command, with the gait corresponding to that of the carriages in front. In regard to the change of gait, these movements are executed according to the principles of No. 493, in order that the right carriages may move out of the line and return to it again at the completion of the movement. I;\ - ---------- ------------ - --- \\" —-- -------- ---— a —-— ~ —------ -- B~ c r y'. ----------- BE e C> — ID __________ tSe - - - - - -E-nd. I ~.~ ----- ------., - 53o-_~Ps./ ~ j mi-Q.::-,.... IPB ___________.~~~ i p SCHOOL OF THE, BATTERY. 311 TO RESUME INTERVALS. 527. When the battery is marching in line with diminished intervals, to cause the regular intervals to be resumed, the captain commands: 1. On right (or left) piece of -- section-full intervals. 2. MARCH. (PLATE 51.) The chief of the section designated repeats the command: On right (or left) piece-full interval; and the other chiefs of sections command: From the right (or left)-full intervals. At the command MARCH, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the carriage of direction in each rank continues to march to the front, and the others oblique from it at an increased gait to regain their intervals. Each carriage regulates its march by the one adjoining towards the carriage of direction, and, when the interval is regained, moves forward on the alignment and resumes its gait. As soon as the movement is completed, the command for the guide is renewed by the captain, and repeated by the chiefs of sections. When the intervals are to be resumed from one of the flanks, the captain commands: 1. On right (or left) piece —full intervals. 2. MARCH. PASSAGE OF OBSTACLES. 528. When the battery is marching in line, to pass an obstacle which presents itself in front of one of the sections, the captain commands: 1. - Section. 2. OBSTACLE. At the command OBSTACLE, the chief of the section designated observes the obstacle, and gives the necessary commands for closing on one of the adjoining sections, removing from it, breaking his section, or halting it and forming in column in rear of one 312 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. of the adjoining sections. The section generally resumes the regular march by means the inverse of those used for passing the obstacle. It resumes its place at an increased gait, and by the commands, Section into line-MARCH, from its chief. The passage of defiles is nothing more than the passage of obstacles, which requires the line to be broken into column of sections, by one of the manceuvres prescribed for passing from the order in line to the order in column. When it becomes necessary to break the sections, they should be formed again in succession by their chiefs as soon as the ground will permit. SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 313 ARTICLE FIFTH. FORMATIONS IN BATTERY. IN LINE, WITH PIECES IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE FRONT. 529. WHEN the battery is in line at a halt, with the pieces in front, to form in battery to the front, the captain commands: 1. IN BATTERY. 2. Guide left. 3. MARCH. (PLATE 52.) These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections, and executed as prescribed in No. 465. The chiefs of pieces and of sections take their posts in battery as soon as that formation is completed. iTis rule is general. After the formation, the captain rectifies the alignment if necessary. The piece originally designated as such, continues to be the guide until the movement is completed, and the alignment is made upon it. When the battery is marching in line with the pieces in front, it is formed in battery to the front according to the same principles, and by the commands: 1. IN BATTERY. 2. MARCH. These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections, and executed as prescribed in No. 465. TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE FRONT, BY THROWING THE CAISSONS TO THE REAR. 530. When the battery is in line at a halt, with the pieces or 2 B 314 SCIOOL OF THE BATTERY. caissons in front, to form in battery to the front by throwing the caissons to the rear, the captain commands: ACTION FRONT. This command is repeated by the chiefs of sections, and executed as prescribed in No. 466. In horse artillery, when the detachments conduct their horses to the rear, the cannoneers are dismounted without command from the captain. When he wishes the horses to be led to their positions by the horse holders, the captain commands Cannoneers, DISMOUNT: immediately after, ACTION FRONT, and the chiefs of sections repeat the commands. The battery is generally in line at a halt when this mode of coming into action is resorted to. It may also be used in successive formations by giving the command ACTION FRONT, when a part of the battery has been halted on the line. But with bad ground or heavy pieces this mode of coming into action should not be used. IN LINE, WITH CAISSONS IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE FRONT. 531. When the battery is in line at a halt, with the caissons in front, to form in battery to the front, the captain commands: 1. Pieces, pass your caissons-MARCH. 2. IN BATTERY-Guide left (or right.) 3. MARCH. (PLATE 52.) These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections, the pieces pass their caissons, as prescribed in No. 520, and at the command IN BATTERY, given as soon as the pieces have passed their caissons, the formation is executed as prescribed in No. 529. In horse artillery, the command IN BATTERY is given when the detachments have passed the caissons. When the battery is marching in line, with the caissons in front, it is formed in battery to the front according to the same principles, and by the commands, Pieces, pass your caissons, Plate 52............. ^-~~-:~ —-~- -~ —r —^...,~; c - 8 * t I I a 1 1 I II I I I r #'.g WA M"jan 1. 1, I' I' "/ k%"' ~E,./t'91 X, AX,, ------- ) 0C_.__ —--------- s $ —~_ >o_ — I~~~ _ hI IfI +~14 ~ ~ ~ ~~ali'~ Ace^"I I - ^ c!3 h - > - ~ "~ t I i. ^~~~A I -- __ 1! - ^ ~ ~ r ^3 IN ^ I~~~~~~-cStf ^i~~~i ~t~~~-'^ "j*~~~~~~~~f~ SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 315 (or Pieces, pass your caissons-trot)-MARCH-IN BATTERYGuide left-MARCH. IN LINE, WITH PIECES IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE REAR. 532. When the battery is in line at a halt, with the pieces in front, to form in battery to the rear, the captain commands: 1. Fire to the rear. 2. Caissons, pass your pieces-trot-MARCH. 3. IN BATTERY. (PLATE 53.) The commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections. At the second, the caissons oblique to the right, pass their pieces at a brisk trot, advance 17 yards beyond them, execute a reverse together, and take their places in battery. At the third, which is given as soon as the caissons have passed, the cannoneers unlimber and prepare for firing. When the cannoneers are mounted on the ammunition chests, the caissons halt to allow the cannoneers to dismount, before executing the reverse. As soon as the caissons halt, the cannoneers dismount and run to their posts. When the battery is at a halt, as in the present case, it is considered better to dismount the cannoneers before commencing the movement. The chief of the line of caissons precedes the movement of his carriages, and places himself on the line to be occupied by their leaders when the reverse is commenced. He takes his place in battery as soon as the reverse is completed and the carriages are on the line. In horse artillery, at the command IN BATTERY, the detachments incline to the right, pass their pieces at a brisk trot, and take their places in battery by a left reverse. The cannoneers then dismount, run to their posts, unlimber, and prepare for firing. When the battery is marching in line, with the pieces in front, the formation in battery to the rear is executed according to the same principles and by the same commands. At the command IN BATTERY, which is given as soon as the caissons have passed 316 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. their pieces, the latter halt, the detachments in horse artillery pass them, and the movement is completed as already described. IN LINE, WITH CAISSONS IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE REAR. 533. When the battery is in line at a halt, with the caissons in front, to form in battery to the rear, the captain commands: 1. Fire to the rear. 2. IN BATTERY. (PLATE 53.) At the command IN BATTERY, which is repeated by the chiefs of sections, the cannoneers unlimber and prepare for firing. The chiefs of pieces and sections take their places in battery. The caissons move at a brisk trot and take their places in battery, under the superintendence of their chief. In horse artillery, at the command IN BATTERY, the detachments pass their pieces at a trot, move to their places in battery, dismount, and run to their posts, as prescribed in No. 532. When the battery is marching in line, with the caissons in front, the formation in battery to the rear is executed according to the same principles and by the same commands. IN BATTERY, TO FORM IN LINE TO THE FRONT. 534. Being in battery, to form in line to the front with the caissons in rear, the captain commands: LIMBER TO THE FRONT. This command is repeated by the chiefs of sections, and the pieces are limbered as described in No. 115; the caissons closing at the same time to the proper distance without further command. When the captain wishes to place the caissons in front, he commands: LIMBER TO THE FRONT; and while the pieces are limbering, Caissons, pass your pieces-trot —MARCH. The caissons pass and halt in front of their pieces; or, if the captain wishes the battery to advance, he commands: FORWARD-Guide right (or left,) as the caissons are completing the passage. Plate 53.! I E^]^.'! i a ~ n i Q!' i X t, i. t. 3 --------------- i P___late 54.. -— 1 ^ ~ ------ \ V' i ~....................] - -—. —- ------— z,; —: —-~.~ —-—. X^! i i i N ^.N.^\5 I' ------- --------------- -------- --. N; K I' 7 t i _ SCIOOL OF THE BATTERY. 317 The commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections. In horse artillery, when the pieces are limbered to the front, the horse holders advance within 2 yards of their pieces; and there the cannoneers mount. When the pieces cannot be wheeled about by hand, the captain commands: LIMBER TO THE REAR; and when this is executed, if he wishes to retain the pieces in front, he commands: 1. Pieces, left about-caissons, forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Battery-HALT. (PLATE 54.) The command LIMBER TO THE REAR is repeated by the chiefs of sections. The first and second commands are also repeated by the chiefs of sections, and the pieces execute the about; the caissons closing at the same time to 2 yards. The third command is given as soon as the about is completed, and the word HALT being repeated by the chiefs of sections, the pieces halt and place themselves squarely on the line. The captain rectifies the alignment, if necessary, and commands: FRONT. When the battery is to advance immediately, the captain commands: FORWARD-Guide right (or left,) instead of BatteryHALT; and the caissons close on the march. (PLATE 54.) When the captain wishes to place the caissons in front, he may cause the pieces to be limbered to the rear as before, and commands: 1. Caissons, pass your pieces —trot-pieces, left about. 2. MARCH. 3. Battery-HALT, or FORWARD-Guide right (or left.) These commands are repeated and executed as prescribed in No. 470. IN BATTERY, TO FORM IN LINE TO THE REAR. 535. When in battery, to form in line to the rear, the captain causes the pieces to be limbered to the rear; and then, if he wishes to place the caissons in front, commands: 2B2 318 SCHOOL OF TIE BATTERY. 1. Caissons; left about —ieces, forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Battery-HALT, or FORWARD-Guide right (or left.) (PLATE 55.) The first two commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections; the caissons execute the about; and the pieces close to their proper distance. The third command, which is given at the moment the about is finished, is repeated and executed as prescribed. The captain rectifies the alignment if necessary, and commands: FRONT. If the formation in line to the rear is to be executed by placing the pieces in front, the captain, after causing the pieces to be limbered to the rear, commands: 1. Pieces, pass your caissons-caissons, left about. 2. MARCH. 3. Battery-HALT, or FORWARD —Guide right (or left.) (PLATE 55.) The first two commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections; and the pieces pass their caissons as the caissons execute the about, No. 472. The third command is repeated and executed according to the principles prescribed in No. 534. The captain rectifies the alignment if necessary, and commands: FRONT. In forming line to the rear the caissons may be placed at once either in front or in rear of their pieces. To effect this the captain commands: LIMBER TO THE REAR, and immediately adds, to place them in front: 1. Caissons, in front of your pieces, (or Caissons, in front of your pieces-trot.) 2. MARCH. If he wishes to place them in rear, the commands are: 1. Caissons, in rear of your pieces, (or Caissons, in rear of your pieces-trot.) 2. MARCH. The commands in both cases, are repeated by the chiefs of sections, and executed as prescribed in No. 472. ^________________________fla+p 58,a i \ i i 1. "i -— ^ ------ - -~ -- Ni N- N- ----- J- J — - - V^V 3^ " --- ----------- + -' - J ^ \i M' i Plate 5. 6/i I 0i 4 //......f. —' t',, 1^ S" 1" I" I'"".,,,, ""A"",,,,., " " ", ",':,,,, \'\,^^^~ ^^ ^ ^' f^ ^ SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 319 IN COLUMN WITH PIECES IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE FRONT. 536. When the battery is in column at a halt, with the pieces in front, to form in battery to the front by gaining ground to the left, the captain commands: 1. Forward into battery-left oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. (PLATE 56.) At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands: Section-forward; and those of the other sections: Section-left oblique. The chief of the line of caissons moves quickly to the right of the leading section, to cause the caissons to halt at the proper time and to superintend their alignment. At the command MARCH, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the movement is executed as prescribed in No. 500, for forming line to the front. But as each section arrives on the line, instead of halting, its chief forms it in battery to the front by the commands: IN BATTERY-MARCH, which are executed as prescribed in No. 465. The formation in battery to the front, by gaining ground to the right, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. The commands are: Forward into battery-right oblique-MARCH —Guide left. When the battery is marching in column, it is formed in battery to the front by applying the principles of Nos. 500 and 465. IN COLUMN WITH CAISSONS IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE FRONT. 537. When the battery is in column at a halt, with the caissons in front, to form in battery to the front by gaining ground to the left, the captain commands: 1. Forward into battery-left oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. 320 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. (PLATE 57.) At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands: Section-forward; and those of the other sections: Section-left oblique. The chief of the line of caissons moves quickly to the right of the leading section, to halt the caissons at the proper time and to superintend their alignment. At the command MARCH, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the movement is executed as prescribed in No. 500, for forming line to the front. But as each section arrives on the line, instead of halting, its chief forms it in battery to the front by the commands, Pieces, pass your caissons-MARCHiIN BATTERYMARCH, which will be executed as prescribed in No. 467. The formation in battery to the front, by gaining ground to the right, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. When the battery is marching in column, it is formed in battery to the front by applying the principles of Nos. 500 and 467. IN COLUMN WITH PIECES IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE REAR. 538. When the battery is in column at a halt, with the pieces in front, to form in battery to the rear, by gaining ground to the left, the captain commands: 1. Into battery faced to the rear-left oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. (PLATE 58.) At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands: Section-forward; and those of the other sections: Section-left oblique. The chief of the line of caissons goes to the right of the leading section, to direct the reverse of the caissons, as prescribed in No. 532, and to superintend their alignment. At the command MARCH, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the movement is executed as prescribed in No. 500, for forming line to the front. But as each section arrives on the line, instead of halting, its chief forms it in battery to the rear by the commands: Fire to the rear-Caissons, pass your pieces-trot t{~~Q/"' ^o-; —----------. — N f --- -3 - -— ~ —- -... —-- - arm - 8 -;33 ----------------- ______ __ - 44/~ itI~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ —-— i -— lk —------- 3 --------- ____________________1. e 53S. 2' /// /^7/ /'Gcc~ /21' 2 //f,-?,,' / 45 i s'" if,,' I A+ I 1 1, 1- 1 l, I,'! \, ^! \ ~^^~ -^~ \^ -vl "-i_ UJU _______ ________________________________ __ ____ ____ Viate 59 i ct/tt-r ii t iY iU!/ I —, - -4",'... ii ~I I \ I xlv>! I t 4I I iA ~ \ i"I SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 321 -MARCH-IN BATTERY, which are executed as prescribed in No. 468. The formation in battery to the rear, by gaining ground to the right, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. When the battery is marching in column, it is formed into battery to the rear by applying the principles of Nos. 500 and 468. IN COLUMN WITH CAISSONS IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE REAR. 539. The battery being in column at a halt, with the caissons in front, to form in battery to the rear, by gaining ground to the left, the captain commands: 1. Into battery faced to the rear-left oblique. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. (PLATE 59.) At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands: Section-forward; and those of the other sections: Section-left oblique. The chief of the line of caissons goes to the right of the leading section, to direct the about of the caissons, and to superintend their alignment. At the command MARCH, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the movement is executed as prescribed in No. 500, for forming line to the front. But as each section arrives on the line, instead of halting, its chief forms it into battery to the rear by the commands, Fire to the rear -IN BATTERY, which are executed as prescribed in No. 469. The formation in battery to the rear, by gaining ground to the right, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. When the battery is marching in column, it is formed into battery to the rear by applying the principles of Nos. 500 and 469. IN COLUMN WITH PIECES IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 540. When the battery is in column, in march, or at a halt, 21 322 SCHICOL OF THE BATTERY. with the pieces in front, if the captain wishes to form it in battery to the left, by gaining ground to the right, he commands: 1. Fire to the left-by section, right wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. Caissons, pass your pieces-trot. 4. MARCH. 5. IN BATTERY. (PLATE 60.) At the first command, the chiefs of sections command: Section-right wheel; and at the second, which they repeat, all the sections wheel to the right, as prescribed in No. 453. The caissons follow their pieces at the proper distance. At the commands, Caissons, pass your pieces-trot-MARCH, which are given before the completion of the wheel, and repeated by the chiefs of sections, all the caissons pass their pieces at a trot. At the command IN BATTERY, which is given and repeated in like manner as soon as the caissons have passed, and the pieces are square on the new line, all the sections form at once into battery to the rear, as prescribed in No. 532. When the captain wishes to form in battery to the left, by gaining ground to the left, he commands 1. Fire to the left-by section, left wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. IN BATTERY. 4. MARCH. (PLATE 61.) At the first command, the chiefs of sections command: Section, left wheel; and at the second, which they repeat, all the sections wheel at once to the left, as prescribed in No. 453. At the command IN BATTERY, which is given and repeated as soon as the caissons have completed the wheel, all the sections form at once into battery to the front, as prescribed in No. 529. The two formations in battery to the right, by gaining ground to the left or right, are executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. The commands are: Fire to the rightby section, left wheel-MARCHI-Caissons, pass your pieces — Pl.at~e ( 0. -- e —----.-'_____ i___________!__ _____'L___L__X___,__.__,___.____________ ________ 6 /'.!' -- ---------------,.",- - ----, —--,,, ^ "" " " ^~ —------ - -------------------------.s. _.'' — -----,.. -----. _ C. _',,~- -i "' —-—, —-7S-A= s rlQ: -~S -LL^~:;'. ^ i''~~~~~~, —----------------- -i t1 0\~~~ ^~~~-4 ) 1^ 1'' -' I e' i I I B I k'! —----— 1w — - -- -N — -------- --- I hA I I ~;! 18 t d X X >- Wa-N / /,,-! Plate 6 2. ~".^^^~?!.f'^^^^ JI. ~~- -- -- -- - -- ~ — - - -------- - " - - - - " - " - - - - - - - ~ I- -l - - - -I -- --.l +'S;,^~~~~82; ~ —-B __ Plate 63.'""~'ufL Li't,/-z'/" 7// (l,,";',/' -,s' - d / / ~ -' i -, --- --— ~ __ — IS' —;F~- /'"~-~ —- --- _. ~./"" t'I i I'r I -- 1 -C-~' ^- ~ —--- tif ///"/ ^'r~ ti t + t'\ s —-- -- X \, I. X I uhfi' ~ O., /.! W Rt S.!/t'. 1 l, / 8?.J ) l' i! i i i' i / SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 323 trot-MARCH-IN BATTERY; (PLATE 62.) Or, Fire to the right -by section, right wheel —MARCH-IN BATTERY-MARCH. IN COLUMN WITH CAISSONS IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 541. When the battery is in column, in march, or at a halt, with the caissons in front, to form it in battery to the left, by gaining ground to the right, the captain commands: 1. Fire to the left-by section, right wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. IN BATTERY. (PLATE 63.) At the first command, the chiefs of sections command: Section-right wheel; and at the second, which they repeat, the sections wheel at once to the right, and move to the front at the commands, FORWARD-Guide right, from their chiefs. At the command IN BATTERY, which is given and repeated as soon as the pieces are square on the new line, all the sections form at once into battery to the rear, as prescribed in No. 533. To form in battery to the left, by gaining ground to the left, the captain commands: 1. Fire to the left-by section, left wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. Pieces, pass your caissons. 4. MARCH. 5. IN BATTERY. 6. MARCH. (PLATE 64.) At the first command, the chiefs of sections command: Section-left wheel; and at the second, which they repeat, the sections wheel at once to the left. The third and fourth commands are given and repeated just before the completion of the wheel; and the fifth is given when the pieces have passed their caissons, and the latter are square upon the new line. The sections are then formed in battery to the front, as prescribed in No. 529. The formations in battery to the right, by gaining ground to 324 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. the right or left, are executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. (PLATE 65.) IN COLUMN WITH PIECES IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY ON THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 542. When the battery is marching in column with the pieces in front, to form in battery on the right, the captain commands: 1. On the right into battery. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands: Section-right wheel; and the chief of the line of caissons goes to that section, (No. 536.) At the command MARCH, repeated by the chief of the leading section, that section wheels to the right, and its chief conducts it to the line by the commands, FORWARD-Guide right, as prescribed in No. 503. And then, without halting, it is formed into battery to the front, as prescribed in No. 465, by the commands, IN BATTERY-MARCIIfrom its chief. The other sections continue to advance; and as each arrives opposite its place in battery, after passing the one preceding it in the formation, it is formed into battery by its chief, by the commands, Section-right wheel~-MARHr-FORWARD-Guide right-IN BATTERY-MARCH; the command IN BATTERY being given as the caissons arrive in line with those already established. The formation in battery on the left is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. When the battery is in column at a halt, it is formed in battery on the right or left according to the same principles. In this case, the chiefs of the two rear sections command: Section-forward, immediately after the first command of the captain, and then repeat the commands MARCH-Guide right (or left.) Plate 6 5. * $' 3 ^ /......: ---- y:,,',, —-g —-~A M " —---- I I M.......'-' I". -....' —^'...... " —$11...... — ~-p &' " ~ " " "^' " " "W \' - " "' " " A"~......... -...... SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 325 IN COLUMN WITH CAISSONS IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY ON THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 543. When the battery is marching in column, with the caissons in front, to form in battery on the right, the captain commands: 1. On the right into battery. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands: Section-right wheel; and the chief of the line of caissons goes to that section, (No. 536.) At the command MARCH, repeated by the chief of the leading section, that section wheels to the right, and is conducted to the line, by the commands, FoRWARD-Guide right, from its chief; as soon as it reaches the line, the section is formed in battery to the front by the commands, Pieces, pass your caissons-MARCH-IN BATTERYMARCH, from its chief, (No. 467.) The other sections continue to advance, and as each arrives opposite its place in battery, after having passed the one preceding it in the formation, it is wheeled to the right, and formed into battery by its chief, in the same manner as the leading section. The formation in battery on the left is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. When the battery is in column at a halt, it is formed in battery on the right or left according to the same principles: the chiefs of the two rear sections giving the additional commands prescribed in No. 542. TO DEPLOY THE DOUBLE COLUMN INTO BATTERY TO THE FRONT OR REAR. 544. The battery being in double column at a halt, to deploy it into battery to the front, the captain commands: 1. Forward into battery. 2. MARCH. 2 c 32 6 SCIOOL OF THE BATTERY. At the first command, the chief of the centre section commands: Section-forward; that of the right: Section into line -right oblique; that of the left: Section into line-left oblique; and the chief of the line of caissons goes to the leading section, (No. 536.) At the command MARCH, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the centre section advances 5 yards, and, without halting, is formed into battery to the front, as prescribed in Nos. 465 or 467, according to the kind of carriage in front. The pieces of the flank sections are brought upon the line by obliquing, and placed successively in battery without command; regulating by the centre section. When the battery is marching in double column, it is deployed into battery to the front in the same manner, except that the chief of the centre section does not command, Section-forward -MARCH. When the battery is in double column, marching, or at a halt, it is deployed into battery to the rear according to the principles prescribed in this number and in Nos. 538 or 539, according to the kind of carriage in front. The commands are: 1. Into battery faced to the rear. 2. MARCH. When the battery consists of four or eight pieces, the double column is deployed into battery to the front or rear, by the same commands from the captain as when it consists of six. The sections are formed into battery as prescribed for the flank sections in this number. The leading chief of section, besides superintending the formation of his own, gives the commands required for the centre section, and the leading pieces conform to the movements of that section. TO DEPLOY THE DOUBLE COLUMN INTO BATTERY TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 545. When the battery is in double column, marching, or at a halt, to form it in battery to the right, the captain commands: 1. To and on the right into battery. 2. MARCH. _late 6 6. -- -^^ i~ I.: I'' ~. ~~~~~~~~ii it mg'siio 4 Cc i, * Sri! 0'lir4 i. A __ _ _ ^-^J^' o,^' j 1: ~I hi " —-8 Xf > i > i i f i I', i ~^-yi^^^t^'~~";' ii^ ~^-^I -^-'l -^i, i''''',//'~~~~~~', SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 327 The centre section is formed in battery on the right, as prescribed for the leading section in Nos. 542 or 543, according to the kind of carriage in front. The other pieces are brought into line as prescribed in No. 514, and, without halting, are formed successively in battery to the front without commands; regulating by the centre section. The deployment into battery to the left is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. When the battery consists of four or eight pieces, the column is deployed into battery to the right or left by the same commands from the captain as when it consists of six. In this case, the leading pieces are wheeled to the right or left as a section, and conducted to the line by the leading chief of section, as prescribed in No. 514. And then, without halting, they are formed into battery to the front by the same chief. The other pieces move forward, wheel in succession as they arrive opposite their places, and form in battery on the alignment of those already established. TO PASS FROM THE ORDER IN BATTERY TO THE ORDER IN COLUMN. 546. Being in battery, to form column, the captain first causes the line to be formed as prescribed in Nos. 534 or 535, and then forms column by one of the manceuvres for passing from the order in line to the order in column. TO MARCH BY A FLANK. 547. Being in battery, to gain ground to the left, for the purpose of forming again in battery without an intermediate formation, the captain causes the pieces to be limbered to the rear, and commands: 1. Pieces right-caissons left-wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide right. (PLATE 66.) These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections, and executed as prescribed in No. 473. 328 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. The movement to gain ground to the left may be executed by limbering at once to the left; the caissons wheeling to the left while the pieces are limbering; and the captain afterwards commanding, Forward-MARCH -Guide right. In horse artillery, the captain warns the horse holders to stand fast whilst the piece is limbered to the rear: they move to the left of their pieces when limbering to the left. The movement to gain ground to the right is executed by either of the methods above described, applying the same principles, and by inverse means. As soon as the battery has reached the position on the left, which it is intended to occupy, the captain commands: 1. Battery by the left flank. 2. MARCH. 3. Fire to the rear. 4. IN BATTERY. The commands, By the left lank —MARCH, are repeated by the chiefs of sections, and executed as usual. The commands, Fire to the rear-IN BATTERY, are given and repeated as soon as the pieces have completed the wheel, and executed as prescribed in No. 533. (PLATE 61.) In horse artillery, the detachments follow the movements of their caissons, and take their places in battery. When the battery is to move to a flank and be formed into battery again on the same line, it may be executed by limbering to the front, marching to a flank, and then commanding, Column -by the right (or left) flankc-MARCI —Fire to the rear-IN BATTERY; the caissons taking their proper places in battery by a left about. The same thing may be executed by limbering to the right or left, gaining ground to the flank, halting, and commanding, ACTION LEFT or ACTION RIGHT; which will be executed as prescribed in No. 473. In horse artillery, the detachments wheel to the right or left and take their places in battery. In all cases when a battery is halted or marching in a flank P~Lagte 6 7.;us~~~~~~~~1 ------- - 1 —- - -' ~' I s- ~ <^> -, j ----- -- -------- v' - -I; ----- _. } ---- --- -,. ~ h 9 ~" T, i: ~cs" ~ ~~~~~ I \, i,:' ~ - ~c ~ _ L3;rz ~c~t ~ ~ s~-~ SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 335 If the battery is in echelon and firing, to form it in the order in battery, continuing the fire, the captain causes the pieces behind the line on which the formation is to be made to cease their fire, and commands: 1. On the right (or left) piece —forward into battery. 2. MARCH. At the first command, the chief of the right section places his left piece on the line, the right continuing its fire. The chiefs of the other sections cause them to be limbered to the front, and at the command MARCH, which they repeat, move them forward, and establish them in battery on a line with the right section. TO FIRE TO THE REAR. 554. When the battery is firing, to fire in the opposite direction, the captain causes the firing to cease, and commands: 1. Fire to the rear. 2. Limbers and caissons, pass your pieces-trot. 3. MARCH. (PLATE 71.) These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections. At the command MARCH, the pieces are wheeled about by turning the trails to the left; and the limbers and caissons oblique to the right, pass them, and take their places in battery by a left reverse. In horse artillery, the horses follow their limbers, pass them, and take their places by reversing to the left. When the horse holders cannot conduct them alone, they are assisted by Nos. 1 and 2. When the pieces cannot be wheeled about by hand, the captain commands: 1. Fire to the rear. 2. LIMBER TO THE REAR. 3. Caissons, pass your pieces-trot-MARCH. 4. Pieces, left about-MARCH. 5. IN BATTERY. 336 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. ARTICLE SEVENTH. CHANGES OF FRONT IN BATTERY. CHANGE OF FRONT TO FIRE TO THE RIGHT, LEFT WING FORWARD, AND THE REVERSE. 555. WHEN the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to make a perpendicular change of front, to fire to the right, throwing forward the left wing, he discontinues firing, and commands: 1. Fire to the right. 2. Change front forward on the right piece. 3. MARCH. (PLATE 72.) At the second command, the chief of the right section places the right piece in the new direction, by causing the trail to be moved to the left. lie also causes the left piece of his section to be moved forward by hand, and established on the new line. When the ground is unmasked, the limbers and caissons of these pieces oblique to the left, move forward, and take their places in battery by wheeling to the right; the caissons aligning themselves by the chief of the line of caissons established on the right. The other chiefs of sections cause their pieces to be limbered by the command, LIMBER TO TIIE FRONT; the caissons, and in horse artillery the horse holders also, closing upon the pieces while they are limbering. As soon as they are limbered, the chiefs of sections command: Forward. At the second command, the chief of the line of caissons places himself on the left of the right piece of the centre section, facing to the front, to mark the right of the new line of caissons. At the command MARCH, repeated by the chiefs of the centre and left sections, these sections move to the front; and, when each has arrived opposite its place on the new line, its chief -H a- ---- J —- --- -- 1^ycC>C -~-" — - ~'~ >.~^~'X'j^~-' —. — -- ----- "-" ~ ----------— ~ -- - X "- "' ~ - -~ —------- A-t - ^^~> - - cz I I"s-t 4 47'; 4 -I ~i^~^sj?81~$'! ^SISIS^' ~^1- II II II II II?-~~~~~~~~~~~~~P SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 33T commands: Section right wheel-MARCH- FORWARD; and afterwards, In battery-MARCH, so as to form upon the alignment of the right section. When the caisson of the right piece of the centre section reaches the point where its piece wheeled, it wheels to the left, takes its distance in rear, wheels about and dresses to the right upon the line of caissons. The other caisson of the same section obliques to the left when its piece commences the wheel; and, after gaining its distance, establishes itself on the line by wheeling and dressing to the right. When the pieces are too heavy to be moved or wheeled about by hand, the chiefs of sections cause them to be limbered, with the exception of the right piece, by the command LIMBER TO THE REAR. The chief of the right section then commands: Piece, left about-caisson, forward; and the chiefs of the other sections: Pieces, left about-caissons, forward. At the command MARCH, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the pieces are wheeled about and directed to the front by the command FORWARD from the chiefs of sections. The left piece of the right section is established on the line by the commands, Right wheel-MARCH -FORWARD-In battery-MARCH, from the chief of the section. The caisson wheels to the left when it reaches the point where its piece wheeled to the right; and, after taking its distance, wheels about and dresses to the right upon the chief of the line of caissons. The other sections are established upon the line as already described. The pivot piece commences firing again, as soon as it is in position, and the others as they arrive on the line. The change of front to fire to the left, right wing forward, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. In horse artillery, the detachments follow their pieces, and halt at the proper distance from the line. That of the left piece of the right section, when limbered, wheels to the left when its piece wheels to the right, allows its caisson to pass it, and takes its place by wheeling about to the left. The horse holders of the pieces not limbered oblique to the left with their limbers, and, 22 2D 338 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. like them, take their places in battery by wheeling to the right. When it is deemed advisable, the captain may retain the cannoneers at their pieces, and allow all the horse holders to conduct their horses to the new line. The same may be done in the other changes of front. CHANGE OF FRONT TO FIRE TO THE LEFT, LEFT WING FORWARD, AND THE REVERSE. 556. When the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to make a perpendicular change of front to fire to the left, throwing forward the left wing, he discontinues firing, and commands: 1. Fire to the left. 2. Change front forward on the right piece. 3. MARCH. (PLATE 73.) At the second command, the chief of the right section causes the right piece to be placed in the new direction at once, by moving the trail to the right; and the limber and caisson of that piece will oblique to the right, and take their places in its rear by wheeling to the left; the caisson dressing upon the chief of the line of caissons. He also causes his left piece to be moved to its place and established on the line by hand; the limber of this piece, passing it on the right, takes its place by wheeling to the left, its caisson obliques to the right, passes on the right, and in rear of the right caisson, and takes its place also by wheeling to the left. The chiefs of the other sections cause them to be limbered to the front; and while limbering they command: Caissons, pass your pieces-trot-MARCH. When this is executed, the chief of the centre section commands: Section-right wheel, and that of the left: Forward. At the command MARCH, repeated by the chiefs of the centre and left sections, these sections move as ordered, with the caissons leading. The centre section is conducted to the line by its chief, and formed by the commands, FORWARD and IN BATTERY. The left section advances 5 yards, and is conducted to the line by two Tlatte 7 3. 1.... —--- --- tl'[, - ~it: ~i~1......... I i I P 1 A II \~ \! - @ @-\.............-l -.. I',, 1 ":,,. i'i 1,, i - iI1' l \ I'.I \ ^ \F -- -' —--------------- -- ----------- S \.',"-/''' ~ ~~" —------ -----',' i i \*:-I::-"'"' I I ~, - _ -........... SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. $39 successive right half wheels. It is there formed in like manner upon the alignment of the right section. At the second command from the captain, the chief of the line of caissons places himself in prolongation of the line, 32 yards on the right of the right piece, and faces to the front, to mark the left of the new line of caissons. When the pieces are too heavy to be wheeled about or moved by hand, the chiefs of sections cause them to be limbered to the rear, with the exception of the right piece. While the pieces are limbering, the chiefs of the centre and left sections cause the caissons to pass as before; and all the chiefs of sections give the cautionary command for their pieces to wheel about. At the command MARCH, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the pieces are wheeled about, and the sections conducted to the new line by the appropriate commands. The caisson of the left piece of the right section takes its place in the same manner as when its piece is moved by hand. The pivot piece recommences firing as soon as it is unmasked; and the others when they arrive on the line. The change of front to fire to the right, right wing forward, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. In horse artillery, the horse holders of those pieces which are placed on the line by hand conduct the horses to their positions in battery by following their limbers. CHANGE OF FRONT TO FIRE TO THE LEFT, LEFT WING TO THE REAR, AND THE REVERSE. 557. When the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to make a perpendicular change of front to fire to the left, throwing the left wing to the rear, he causes the firing to cease, and commands: 1. Fire to the left. 2. Change front to the rear on the right piece. 3. MARCH. (PLATE 74.) At the second command, the chief of the right section places the right piece in the new direction, by causing the 340 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. trail to be moved to the right. He also causes the left piece of his section to be moved to the rear by hand and established on the new line. The limbers and caissons of these pieces move at once to the right, obliquing sufficiently to place themselves in rear of their respective pieces, and take their places by wheeling or reversing to the left. The other chiefs of sections command: Limber to the rear, and immediately afterwards, Caissons, in front of your pieces -trot —MARCH. The caissons place themselves in front of their pieces, while they are limbering, and halt as prescribed in No. 472. The chief of the centre section then commands: Section-left wheel; that of the left section: Section-forward. The chief of the line of caissons places himself in the prolongation of the line, 32 yards on the right of the right piece, and faces to the rear to mark the right of the new line of caissons. At the command MARCH, given by the captain, and repeated by the chiefs of the centre and left sections, those sections are put in motion and placed in battery on the line, the chief of the left section wheeling it to the left when it is opposite its position. When the pieces are too heavy to be moved by hand, the chief of the right section causes his left piece to be limbered to the rear with the rest, and then commands: Left wheel. At the command MARCH, repeated by this chief, the piece wheels to the left, and is conducted by him to its place by the commands, FORWARD -IN BATTERY. The caisson takes its place, as before described. The pivot piece recommences firing as soon as it is unmasked; and the others when they arrive on the line. The change of front to fire to the right, right wing to the rear, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. In horse artillery, the detachments, at the command IN BATTERY, take their places by the regular movement, described in No. 469. The horse holders of those pieces which are moved by hand follow their limbers and conduct the horses to their positions, by movements corresponding to those of their caissons. When the left piece of the right section is limbered, the horses P-late 74. X: 4 - i tI i.Y 1 1,1,I, / I I ~; i i I I "', i i i i.Z f^ i.I i i i.! i!. Plate 75. i ---— ~~~ —-----, i — VaS -----------— I L X i; —----— t A,,, t ~ ~ ~ ~...... ~t','u,. An,,,,i,~. If \,, -- I I I~ ~~~~Ad _ 4 —--— ~-~, ~ ~, t''. ~ H e. 4, SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 841 of the detachment are conducted to their places in the same manner as though the piece were unlimbered, except that the detachment mounts. CHANGE OF FRONT TO FIRE TO THE RIGHT, LEFT WING TO THE REAR, AND THE REVERSE. 558. When the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to make a perpendicular change of front to fire to the right, throwing the left wing to the rear, he discontinues firing, and commands: 1. Fire to the right. 2. Change front to the rear on the right piece. 3. MARCH. (PLATE 75.) At the second command, the chief of the right section commands: Limbers and caissons, in rear of your pieces -trot-MARCH. The limbers and caissons oblique to the right, and pass their pieces, with the limbers leading. As soon as the limbers have passed, they wheel twice to the left and cover their pieces. The caissons pass their limbers and cover them in like manner. The chief of the section causes the trail of his right piece to be moved to the left, and his left piece to be placed upon the new alignment by hand. The chiefs of other sections command: LIMBER TO THE REAR, and Caissons, in rear of your pieces-trot —MARCH. When this is executed, they command: Forward. At the second command, the chief of the line of caissons places himself on the left of the right piece of the centre section, facing to the rear, to mark the left of the new line of caissons. At the command MARCH, from the captain, repeated by the chiefs of the centre and left sections, those sections, as well as the limbers and caissons of the first, are established upon the new line, as described in No. 555. When the pieces cannot be moved by hand, the chief of the right section causes his left piece to be limbered like the rest; and then causes the remaining limber and the caissons to pass, as 2D2 342 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. before described. When the piece is limbered, he commands: Left wheel. At the command MARCH, from the captain, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the piece is wheeled and conducted to its place on the line, as in No. 555. The pivot piece recommences firing as soon as it is placed in the new direction; and the others as they arrive on the line. The change of front to fire to the left, right wing to the rear, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. In horse artillery, the horse holders of the pieces which are moved by hand follow their limbers, and wheel into their places in like manner. The remainder is executed as in No. 555. TO PASS A DEFILE IN FRONT. 559. When the battery is firing, to pass a defile in front of the right section, the captain commands: 1. To the front-by the right section-pass the defile. 2. MARCH. (PLATE 76.) At the first command, the chief of the right section discontinues firing, limbers his pieces to the front, and commands: Forward. At the command MARCH, repeated by this chief, who also commands: Guide left, the section moves forward, passes the defile, and is again established in battery, and the firing commenced by his command. When the pieces are too heavy to be wheeled about by hand, the chief of the section causes them to be limbered to the rear, wheeled about, and the caissons closed, before giving the command Forward. As soon as the right section commences firing, the centre is put in motion in like manner. Its chief conducts it through the defile by successive wheels, and forms it into battery in line with the first. As soon as the centre section commences firing, the left passes in like manner. While one section is passing the defile, the others continue firing; care being taken not to injure the section in advance. Pl ate 76....-.-.- _.-.-.-.-.-. — --- --. -...... —.. ^ - ~ —-- - -- - - -- - - — i "..... 11.. --,; "-_ - -.... — ---- rI1 1- - 01- 4 — ------ \ —-- ---.Il,,.. [._._._._..-. -w ------- - ------ 1 ^ 1 11 1e I~I I I I I I' l l'^ ^ ^ ^ ~^7-f - 0 -4 4 Plate 77.,,4Xt,,4tF,'~~~-~~~"~~~z/,'t -'''', - ---- -. - I I- I 1. I,, - ----— II 11 - I I -- / -- " " ^-' ""', ------- I 1 —'. —----- ~ —-- 1 -- ~^ t. —.. —.._j~$ -.. —.. —..-L.-_..-. —..-L._-..-_..__. fc -.-.-.~~L_.~,.1^ ___________________________________________I_________________________________________ SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 343 When the defile is in front of the left section, it is passed according to the same principles, commencing with that section. When the defile is in front of the centre section, it is passed according to the same principles, commencing with that section, and by the commands, To the front-by the centre section-pass the defile-MARCH. Unless there is some reason to the contrary, the right section will pass before the left. When the flank or oblique march is better suited to the nature of the ground, the chiefs of sections will give the required commands. When the defile will admit but one piece at a time, the sections are broken by their chiefs in such a manner as to cause the nearest piece to enter first. The sections are re-formed by their chiefs immediately after passing the defile. TO PASS A DEFILE IN REAR. 560. When the battery is firing, to pass a defile in rear of the centre section, the captain commands: 1. To the rear-by the right section-pass the defile. 2. MARCH. (PLATE 77.) At the first command, the chief of the right section discontinues firing, limbers to the rear, and commands: Caissons, left about-pieces, forward. At the command MARCH, repeated by the chief of the right section, the caissons of that section execute the about, and the pieces close to their proper distance at a trot. As soon as the about is completed, the chief commands: FORWARD-Guide left, conducts the section through the defile by successive wheels, and forms it into battery in rear of its first position. The left section is put in motion as soon as the right commences firing. It is conducted through the defile by its chief, and formed into battery in rear of its first position, by the principles already described. The centre section moves as soon as the left commences firing. 344 SCHOOL OF TIEE BATTERY. It is formed into battery in rear of its first position, and in line with the other two sections. The passage of the defile may be executed, commencing with the left section, according to the same principles, and by inverse means. When the defile is in rear of one of the flanks, the movement should commence with the other. It should always end by passing the section or piece covering the defile. When the defile will admit but one piece at a time, the sections are broken by their chiefs in such a manner as to cause the piece farthest from the defile to enter first; and the sections are again formed, as soon as possible after leaving the defile. PARADE FOR REVIEW AND INSPECTION. 561. The battery being in line, with the pieces in front; the first sergeant 2 yards from the right; the bugler and guidon in one rank, 6 yards on his right; the quartermaster-sergeant 2 yards from the left; the artificers in one rank, 6 yards on his left; all dressed on the lead drivers of the pieces; the captain commands: 1. ATTENTION. 2. Prepare for review 3. ACTION FRONT. 4. Right-DRESS. 5. FRONT. (PLATES 78, 79.) At the third command, the battery is formed as directed; the chiefs of sections take their places in the centres of their sections, 3 yards in front of the line of muzzles; and the chiefs of pieces, without dismounting, take their places at their posts, in battery. The non-commissioned staff, buglers, guidon, and artificers reverse with the limbers, and take their places, in the order already directed, on a line with the lead drivers; the cannoneers are at their posts. At the fourth command, the battery is aligned-the chiefs of sections, the pieces, and the limbers by the captain; and the caissons by the chief of the line of caissons. Plaite 78. QCtrzyrx / u r, r xuiAf A~ectccgzn J/Z'ufzdcd JBa-eiy. 5- 5 ----- -1 l. —--- ----------- 14 ----— > H'.,.~.. ~^: ^^ ^'. ~^~ 6-i- ^61/ D6 C y e ZewC/ J1^C -/ =forise ar 7'tledy. I I" I' 5.. I W 1 At 1 1 1 1 1- I C - X 1g i k 1 W F~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~< SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 345 At the fifth command, given by the captain when the alignment is completed, the chief of the line of caissons takes his position in battery. The captain then commands: Draw-SABRES. This is executed by the staff sergeants, chiefs of pieces, and artificers only; and the captain takes post 12 yards in front of the centre of the battery, (8 yards, if there are two or more batteries in line,) faces to the front, and awaits the approach of the reviewing officer. When the reviewing officer is midway between the camp-color and the captain, the latter reverses to the right, and commands: Present-SABRES. He immediately resumes his front and salutes, as do all whose sabres are drawn; and the music plays according to the rank of the reviewing officer. The reviewing officer having halted, and acknowledged the salute, the captain brings his sword to a carry, reverses as before, and commands: Carry-sABRES. He immediately resumes his front; the reviewing officer turns off to the right of the battery, passes along its front, and returns to the right by passing between the lines of carriages, or in rear of the caissons. While the reviewing officer is passing around the battery, the music plays. It ceases when he turns off to take his post at the camp-color. When the music ceases, the captain faces the battery, and commands: LIMBER TO THE FRONT, and all assume their places in line. The reviewing officer having taken a position near the campcolor, the captain causes the cannoneers to mount, and breaks the battery into column of sections to the right by the usual commands He then commands: Pass in review, 346 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. and puts the column in march, at a walk, with the guide to the right. The captain then places himself at the head of the column, 4 yards in advance of the chief of the leading section; the trumpeters or buglers march 4 yards in advance of the captain; the chief of the line of caissons outside the column, opposite the centre, and 4 yards from the left flank; the first sergeant and quartermaster-sergeant outside the column, 4 yards from the left flank, the former abreast th~e lead drivers of the leading section, the latter abreast the lead drivers of the rear section; the artificers in one rank, 4 yards in rear of the column; the guidon at the side of the chief of the directing piece. When the head of the column has arrived within 40 yards of the reviewing officer, the music begins to play, and as soon as the latter has passed, it wheels out of the column to a position in front of the reviewing officer, where it faces him, and continues to play until the column has passed. It then ceases, follows in rear of the battery, and resumes its place at the head of the column, after the next change of direction. All the officers salute in succession, as they arrive within 6 yards of the reviewing officer, casting their eyes towards him at the same time, and bringing their sabres to a carry after having passed him 6 yards. As soon as the captain has saluted he places himself on the left of the reviewing officer, passing by his rear, remains until the battery has passed, and then rejoins it, again passing by the rear. The column is so conducted as to march parallel to the line on which the battery is to form, and far enough in its rear to enable the column to wheel into line. It is then wheeled into line, formed in battery, and the review terminated by a salute as at the beginning. When instructions have been previously given, to pass a second time, either at a trot or gallop, it will be done before wheeling into line, the officers passing the second time without saluting. 562. When artillery is reviewed with other troops, the pieces, on coming into battery, are dressed on them, the wheels SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 347 being in the prolongation of the line of the front rank, the chiefs of sections place themselves on the line of company officers, and the captain on the line of field officers. At the command, CLOSE ORDER, instead of limbering to the front, the captain commands: 1. LIMBER TO THE REAR. 2. Pieces, left about- Caissons, forward. 3. MARCH. 4. Battery-IHALT. These commands are executed, and the pieces halt with their lead drivers on a line with the other troops. After passing in review and reaching the ground on which it is to form, the battery may be wheeled by section to the right, and after gaining the necessary distance to the rear, countermarched, and established on the line. 563. When a battery is to march past in line or in column of half batteries, it will be done according to the principles already described. In line, the officers, etc. will be at their usual posts. In column of half batteries, the captain will be 2 yards in advance of the chief of the leading half battery; each chief of half battery 2 yards in front of the centre of his command; the chief of the centre section on the left of the leading half battery 4 yards from its centre, and the chief of the line of caissons in the same position with respect to the rear half battery. In eight-gun batteries, when the column is formed by half battery, the chiefs of sections who do not command half batteries retain their places in their sections. The buglers are 4 yards in front of the captain. The first sergeant and quartermaster-sergeant are outside the column of half batteries, 4 yards from the left flank, the former abreast the lead driver of the leading, the latter abreast the lead driver of the rear half battery, the artificers in one rank, 4 yards in rear of the column, the guidon at the side of the chief of the directing piece. 348 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. OFFICERS' SALUTE WITH THE SABRE. 564. When officers are to salute, whether on horseback or on foot, at a halt or in march, they execute it in four motions: 1st. At 6 yards from the person to be saluted, raise the sabre perpendicularly, the point upwards, edge to the left, the hand opposite to and I foot from the right shoulder, the wrist 6 inches from the body. 2d. Lower the blade, extending the arm to its full length, the hand in quarte, until the point of the sabre is near the foot. 3d. Raise the sabre quickly, the point upwards as in the first motion, after the person saluted is passed 4 yards. 4th. Bring the sabre to a carry. INSPECTION. 565. Batteries of field artillery will always, for inspection, be formed either in line or in battery. The knapsacks of the cannoneers are strapped on the footboards of the ammunition chests. If the inspector wishes to examine the clothing of the men on the field, the knapsacks and valises will be unstrapped, laid at the feet of the men and opened, the drivers being dismounted for the purpose. THE END. t}7.1 t C 80. /oops. Sc/u' t./ 2a IlfTHitcher or of'boovii J~ iots. Szngle~not. Tecwa^'s s Krio-t,. Germ~an,- K7Snot.A rttficer-:s no-t. (capstan. or l rL o/ocueJwt..... lt/jes. *l5/wrt Splice^ 1. Is FITlte 81. BUTGLE SIGNALS. 1. MARCSe FOR REVIET..- I k _1 2. TZALK. 3. TlROT. 4. GALLZOP. n ~ 1~_. 1N Plate 8 2. 5. HALT. io de atCo. 6. EORLWI-ALD. 7. HEAD OF COL UMV/L TO TIE _PU)lHT.i 8. HE)AD OF C OLUZMXiN TO THE LEFT. 9. RIUGHT OBLIQUTE. Mlo cto d. _ 10. LEFT OBIIQUE. Ail.Z.egro., I1. ABOUT. 12. COUTNTERlALRCH. 3 0& Flate 83. 13. DIJVERIS MOUNT. Allegiro. 14. D.RIVET-PS DISM3OUNT. 15. CATONiE EER. S MOUNT..t, I 7n~ I6. iN 33ATTERLY. IAlkro __________ 17. COADIENCE FIRIUANG 18. CEASE FIRINYG. Pre!sto. 19. BOOTS A TND SADDIES. Alleg7o. 3 -= - Plate 84. 20. THE GENERi L. Vivwcc. 3 3 33 3 3 3 3 21. TO HORSE. IPresto. 3 22. ASSEMBLY. moderate. to. Plate 85. 23. THE REVILLE. 110=. * Aegro. I: 24. STABLE CALL. I' ~, ~, ~, ~- ~,. _~ ~ —---—;~ 25. TI-ATERING- CALL. 26. BR CI; 7I{FAST. Allegro. 3, s - t I: * ~.w-~~ ~,~,~.~~j Pl te 8 6. 27. ASSEMBiY Op BUGLEIL'S. 3 28. ASSEIMzLY OF GUMAR. 29. FATIGUE CALL. 30..BRIL CASLL. Alle~gro. Flate 87. 31. DINNER CALL. 32. SICK CALL. r- ~ 3 3 3 33. TATTOO. z2 7% Al_4 Plate 88. 34-. RE ILEA. T. ---'t J II l2,O- -As n sjtu sz,play to tre mars*k - I, J I' I L I _' I